Bizhub c451 c550 c650 Um

C451/C550/C650
User Manual
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 1.2 Energy Star.................................................................................................................................... 1-3 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ............................................................................................. 1-3 Explanation of manual conventions .............................................................................................. Safety advices ................................................................................................................................... Sequence of action ........................................................................................................................... Tips.................................................................................................................................................... Special text markings........................................................................................................................ 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4
1.3
Descriptions and symbols for originals and paper ...................................................................... 1-6 "Width" and "Length"........................................................................................................................ 1-6 Paper orientation ............................................................................................................................... 1-6 Legal restrictions on copying......................................................................................................... 1-7 Safety information ........................................................................................................................... 1-8 Warning and precaution symbols...................................................................................................... 1-8 Meaning of symbols .......................................................................................................................... 1-8 Disassemble and modification .......................................................................................................... 1-8 Power cord ........................................................................................................................................ 1-9 Power source .................................................................................................................................... 1-9 Power plug ...................................................................................................................................... 1-10 Grounding........................................................................................................................................ 1-10 Installation ....................................................................................................................................... 1-11 Ventilation........................................................................................................................................ 1-11 Actions in response to troubles....................................................................................................... 1-12 Consumables .................................................................................................................................. 1-12 When moving the machine.............................................................................................................. 1-13 Before successive holidays............................................................................................................. 1-13 Regulation notices ........................................................................................................................ CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU).............................. User Instructions FCC Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices (for U.S.A. users)................................ Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) ..................... For users in countries not subject to class B regulations ............................................................... Laser safety ..................................................................................................................................... Internal laser radiation ..................................................................................................................... CDRH regulations............................................................................................................................ For European users ......................................................................................................................... For Denmark users .......................................................................................................................... For Finland, Sweden users.............................................................................................................. For Norway users ............................................................................................................................ Laser safety label ............................................................................................................................ Ozone release.................................................................................................................................. Acoustic noise (for European users only) ........................................................................................ For EU member states only............................................................................................................. Caution notations and labels ....................................................................................................... Space requirements ...................................................................................................................... Options ........................................................................................................................................... Operation precautions .................................................................................................................. Power source .................................................................................................................................. Operating environment.................................................................................................................... Storage of copies ............................................................................................................................ 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-14 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-17 1-17 1-17 1-18 1-18 1-19 1-20 1-21 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-22
1.4 1.5
1.6
1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10
1.11
OpenSSL Statement...................................................................................................................... 1-23 OpenSSL License............................................................................................................................ 1-23 Original SSLeay License ................................................................................................................. 1-23 Software licence agreement ........................................................................................................ 1-25
1.12
bizhub C451/C550/C650
Contents-1
Copy Operations
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-3 Basic settings screens .................................................................................................................... 2-5 Icons that appear in the screen...................................................................................................... 2-7 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power .................................................................... 2-8 Turning on the machine ..................................................................................................................... 2-8 Scanning during warm-up ................................................................................................................. 2-9 Turning off the machine................................................................................................................... 2-10 Manually conserving energy ............................................................................................................ 2-10 Controlling each users use of this machine (User authentication) ................................................. 2-11 Controlling each accounts use of this machine (Account track) .................................................... 2-14 Loading paper into tray 1 and tray 2 ............................................................................................ Loading paper into tray 3 .............................................................................................................. Loading paper into tray 4 .............................................................................................................. Loading paper into the LCT .......................................................................................................... Loading paper into the bypass tray ............................................................................................. Feeding the document .................................................................................................................. Loading the document into the ADF................................................................................................ Placing the document on the original glass .................................................................................... Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) ........................................ Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass............................................................... 2-17 2-19 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-28 2-31
2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10
2.11
Selecting a paper setting .............................................................................................................. 2-35 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) ........................................................ 2-35 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...................................................................................... 2-36 Specifying a zoom setting............................................................................................................. Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom setting) ........................................................ Specifying the zoom ratio of the document ("Full Size" setting) ..................................................... Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)................................................................................. Selecting a preset zoom ratio ("Enlarge and Reduce" settings)...................................................... 2-37 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40
2.12
2.13 2.14 2.15
Selecting an Original > Copy setting (Duplex/Combine)............................................................ 2-41 Selecting a combined copy setting.............................................................................................. 2-42 Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ("Combined Copy" settings) ..................... 2-43 Selecting the quality of the document ......................................................................................... 2-45 Loading documents with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings) ...................................... 2-45 To select an original type setting..................................................................................................... 2-46 Selecting finishing settings........................................................................................................... Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)....................................................................................... Separating copies by pages ("Group" setting) ................................................................................ Selecting the output tray ................................................................................................................. Stapling copies ("Staple" settings) .................................................................................................. Punching holes in copies ("Punch" settings)................................................................................... Selecting a folding setting ............................................................................................................ Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) ...................................................................................... Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)......................................................... To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)....................................................................................... Temporarily stopping scanning/printing ..................................................................................... Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode) ..................................................................................... Registering copy programs (Mode Memory) .............................................................................. Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory) ....................................................... Displaying function descriptions (Help)....................................................................................... Overview of help screens ................................................................................................................ Displaying main help screens .......................................................................................................... Copy paper ..................................................................................................................................... Possible paper sizes........................................................................................................................ Paper types and paper capacities................................................................................................... Special paper................................................................................................................................... 2-48 2-51 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-57 2-60 2-60 2-63 2-66 2-68 2-69 2-70 2-73 2-75 2-75 2-77 2-79 2-79 2-80 2-81
2.16
2.17
2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22
2.23
Contents-2
2.24
Selecting the paper settings ........................................................................................................ Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting) ...................................................... Selecting a paper size setting ("Size" setting)................................................................................. Specifying a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings) .................................................... Storing a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings).......................................................... Selecting a setting for oversized paper ("Wide Paper" settings) .................................................... Specifying a setting for special paper............................................................................................. Printing double-sided copies manually ........................................................................................... Original documents ....................................................................................................................... Documents that can be loaded into the ADF .................................................................................. Precautions for loading documents into the ADF ........................................................................... Documents that can be placed on the original glass...................................................................... Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass .........................................................
2-83 2-83 2-84 2-86 2-87 2-90 2-92 2-93 2-95 2-95 2-96 2-96 2-96
2.25
2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 2.36 2.37 2.38 2.39 2.40
Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) ............................ 2-97 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function).......................................................................... 2-100 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function) ............................................... 2-103 Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page ("Insert Image" function) ............................................................................................................ 2-107 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function) ................................ 2-110 Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function).......................................................................................................... 2-113 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) ........... 2-117 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) ......................................................................... 2-121 Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages ("Poster Mode" function)............................. 2-125 Copying booklets ("Booklet Original" function) ....................................................................... 2-129 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) .............................................. 2-131 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) ............................................ 2-134 Printing the date/time or page number on copies ("Stamp/Composition" functions) ......... 2-136 Saving the scanned document in a user box ("Save in User Box" function) ......................... 2-137 Overview of utility mode parameters ........................................................................................ 2-140 List of registration information and parameters ............................................................................ 2-140
Print Operations
3.1 Setting up the PCL driver for Windows ......................................................................................... Common settings .............................................................................................................................. Basic tab ........................................................................................................................................... Layout tab ......................................................................................................................................... Finish tab........................................................................................................................................... Cover mode tab................................................................................................................................. Stamp/Composition tab .................................................................................................................... Quality tab ......................................................................................................................................... Other tab ........................................................................................................................................... Configure tab..................................................................................................................................... Settings tab ....................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6
3.2
Specifying the basic tab settings (PCL driver for Windows) ....................................................... 3-7 Printing to suit the paper size............................................................................................................ 3-7 Specifying a custom size .................................................................................................................. 3-8 Selecting the paper tray .................................................................................................................... 3-8 Specifying the paper type for a paper tray........................................................................................ 3-9 Selecting the output method........................................................................................................... 3-10 Specifying the user authentication settings .................................................................................... 3-12 Specifying the account track settings............................................................................................. 3-13 Specifying the layout tab settings (PCL driver for Windows).................................................... Printing multiple pages on one page (N in 1, Poster mode)............................................................ Chapter............................................................................................................................................ Specifying duplex/booklet printing ................................................................................................. Setting the binding margin .............................................................................................................. Shifting images................................................................................................................................ 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-17
3.3
Contents-3
3.4
Specifying the finish tab settings (PCL driver for Windows) ..................................................... Stapling............................................................................................................................................ Specifying the saddle stitch setting................................................................................................. Hole punching.................................................................................................................................. Folding ............................................................................................................................................. Specifying the output tray ............................................................................................................... Specifying the procedure for adjusting the binding position........................................................... Specifying the cover mode tab settings (PCL driver for Windows) .......................................... Printing documents with a front cover/back cover.......................................................................... Printing documents with a front cover/back cover from a post inserter ......................................... Printing multiple pages .................................................................................................................... Printing with transparency interleaves............................................................................................. Specifying the stamp/composition tab settings (PCL driver for Windows) ............................. Printing a watermark........................................................................................................................ Editing a watermark......................................................................................................................... Printing different original documents together (overlay).................................................................. Editing an overlay file....................................................................................................................... Creating an overlay file .................................................................................................................... Registering an overlay file................................................................................................................ Printing with copy protection........................................................................................................... Printing the date and page numbers ............................................................................................... Printing a header and a footer .........................................................................................................
3-18 3-18 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-31 3-31
3.5
3.6
3.7
Specifying the quality tab settings (PCL driver for Windows) ................................................... 3-32 Adjusting the color and quality ........................................................................................................ 3-32 Font Settings ................................................................................................................................... 3-33 Setting up the PostScript driver for Windows............................................................................. Common settings ............................................................................................................................ Basic tab.......................................................................................................................................... Layout tab........................................................................................................................................ Finish tab ......................................................................................................................................... Cover mode tab............................................................................................................................... Stamp/Composition tab .................................................................................................................. Quality tab ....................................................................................................................................... Other tab.......................................................................................................................................... Advanced tab .................................................................................................................................. Device settings tab .......................................................................................................................... Configure tab ................................................................................................................................... Settings tab ..................................................................................................................................... 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-37 3-37 3-38 3-38
3.8
3.9
Setting up the PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2 ................................................................................... 3-39 Page setup dialog box..................................................................................................................... 3-39 Print dialog box................................................................................................................................ 3-40 Page Setup (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2) ..................................................................................... Page attributes (basic settings) ....................................................................................................... Custom page sizes .......................................................................................................................... PostScript options ........................................................................................................................... Printing (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2)............................................................................................ General (basic settings) ................................................................................................................... Layout (printing multiple pages on one page) ................................................................................. Printer specific options (Finishing options)...................................................................................... Setting options (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2) ............................................................................... Setting up the PPD driver for Mac OS X...................................................................................... Page setup dialog box..................................................................................................................... Print dialog box................................................................................................................................ Common settings in the print dialog box ........................................................................................ 3-42 3-42 3-43 3-44 3-45 3-45 3-46 3-46 3-48 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-52
3.10
3.11
3.12 3.13
3.14
Page setup (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ........................................................................................ 3-53 Page attributes (basic settings) ....................................................................................................... 3-53 Custom page sizes .......................................................................................................................... 3-54 Printing (PPD driver for Mac OS X) .............................................................................................. 3-55 General settings............................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.15
Contents-4
3.16
Output Method (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ................................................................................. Selecting the output method........................................................................................................... Specifying the user authentication settings .................................................................................... Specifying the account track settings............................................................................................. Checking the output method setting details ................................................................................... Layout/Finish (PPD driver for Mac OS X) .................................................................................... Shifting images................................................................................................................................ Chapter............................................................................................................................................ Checking the layout/finish setting details .......................................................................................
3-56 3-56 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-63 3-65 3-66 3-67
3.17
3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21
Paper tray/output tray (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ..................................................................... 3-68 Specifying the paper type for a paper tray...................................................................................... 3-69 Cover mode/transparency interleave (PPD driver for Mac OS X)............................................. 3-70 Per page setting (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ............................................................................... 3-72 Adding and editing the settings in per page setting ....................................................................... 3-73 Stamp/Composition (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ......................................................................... Printing with copy protection .......................................................................................................... Printing the date and time ............................................................................................................... Printing the page numbers .............................................................................................................. Printing a header and a footer......................................................................................................... Quality (PPD driver for Mac OS X) ............................................................................................... Sending a fax ................................................................................................................................. Fax operations................................................................................................................................. Selecting a recipient from the phone book ..................................................................................... Specifying the transmission settings............................................................................................... Creating a fax cover sheet .............................................................................................................. Setting up the fax driver for Windows ......................................................................................... Common settings ............................................................................................................................ Fax tab ............................................................................................................................................ Basic tab ......................................................................................................................................... Layout tab ....................................................................................................................................... Stamp/Composition tab .................................................................................................................. Configure tab................................................................................................................................... Settings tab ..................................................................................................................................... Using a phone book ...................................................................................................................... Adding a recipient to the phone book............................................................................................. Editing a phone book ...................................................................................................................... To change a registered recipient to a group ................................................................................... To change a group name ................................................................................................................ To create a folder ............................................................................................................................ To search the personal information................................................................................................. 3-74 3-75 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 3-81 3-83 3-84 3-85 3-88 3-88 3-89 3-89 3-89 3-89 3-89 3-90 3-91 3-91 3-93 3-94 3-94 3-94 3-94
3.22 3.23
3.24
3.25
Box Operations
4.1 Saving copies in user boxes........................................................................................................... 4-3 Settings that can be saved and changed.......................................................................................... 4-3 Saving copy documents.................................................................................................................... 4-4 Saving scans in user boxes ............................................................................................................ 4-7 Using a user box destination............................................................................................................. 4-7 Entering destinations directly ............................................................................................................ 4-8 Saving in user box mode................................................................................................................. 4-10 Saving on external memory from User Box mode .......................................................................... 4-12 Saving printouts in user boxes..................................................................................................... Saving data in a user box................................................................................................................ Saving data in the secure print user box......................................................................................... Saving data in the encrypted PDF user box ................................................................................... Overview of document organizing............................................................................................... Available operations in the file document screen ........................................................................... Checking documents saved in user boxes ..................................................................................... Description of file document screen ............................................................................................... Searching for a user box name ....................................................................................................... 4-14 4-14 4-16 4-18 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-22 4-23
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5 4.6
Deleting a document ..................................................................................................................... 4-24 Changing the document name..................................................................................................... 4-25
Contents-5
4.7 4.8 4.9
Moving a document ....................................................................................................................... Duplicating a document ................................................................................................................ Checking document details .......................................................................................................... Check the details ............................................................................................................................. Preview screen operations .............................................................................................................. Overview of document printing .................................................................................................... Available operations in the use document screen........................................................................... Checking documents saved in user boxes ..................................................................................... Description of use document screen............................................................................................... Searching for a user box name ....................................................................................................... Printing ........................................................................................................................................... Available print settings .................................................................................................................... To print a document ........................................................................................................................ Changing the number of copies ...................................................................................................... Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing................................................................................ Specifying finishing settings ............................................................................................................
4-27 4-29 4-31 4-31 4-33 4-35 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-39 4-39 4-40
4.10
4.11
4.12
Combined printing ......................................................................................................................... 4-44 Available combined printing parameters ......................................................................................... 4-44 To print a document ........................................................................................................................ 4-44 Overview of document transmissions ......................................................................................... Available document transmission operations.................................................................................. Transmission methods .................................................................................................................... Checking documents saved in user boxes ..................................................................................... Description of use document screen............................................................................................... Searching for a user box name ....................................................................................................... To send a document........................................................................................................................ Secure print user box .................................................................................................................... Available printing parameters .......................................................................................................... To print a document (Mode 1) ......................................................................................................... To print a document (Mode 2) ......................................................................................................... 4-47 4-47 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-51 4-51 4-54
4.13
4.14
4.15
Encrypted PDF user box ............................................................................................................... 4-57 Printing............................................................................................................................................. 4-57 Deleting............................................................................................................................................ 4-59
Network Scanner Operations

5.1 Using scan/fax programs................................................................................................................ 5-3 Recalling a scan/fax program............................................................................................................ 5-3 Registering scan/fax programs ......................................................................................................... 5-7 Editing and deleting scan/fax programs.......................................................................................... 5-10 Sending data in an e-mail message (Scan to e-mail) ................................................................. Scan to e-mail.................................................................................................................................. Selecting a destination from the address book............................................................................... Selecting a group destination.......................................................................................................... Entering addresses directly ............................................................................................................. Selecting a destination that was searched for ................................................................................ Selecting a destination with an address search .............................................................................. Sending data to a computer on the network (Scan to SMB) ..................................................... Scan to SMB.................................................................................................................................... Scan to SMB operations with Windows File Sharing (Mac OS X)/Samba (Linux/Unix) .................. Scan to SMB operations with Windows 98 SE and Windows Me .................................................. Selecting a destination from the address book............................................................................... Entering addresses directly ............................................................................................................. Sending data to a server (Scan to FTP) ....................................................................................... Scan to FTP ..................................................................................................................................... Selecting a destination from the address book............................................................................... Entering addresses directly ............................................................................................................. Sending data to a server (WebDAV)............................................................................................. WebDAV .......................................................................................................................................... Selecting a destination from the address book............................................................................... Entering addresses directly ............................................................................................................. 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-14 5-16 5-17 5-20 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-29 5-31 5-31 5-32 5-34
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Contents-6
5.6
Using Web Service ........................................................................................................................ Specifying the scan command from the control panel of the machine .......................................... Checking the Web Service destinations ......................................................................................... Searching for a Web Service destination ........................................................................................ Giving a scan command from a computer...................................................................................... Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/ communication settings) .............................................................................................................. Settings that can be specified......................................................................................................... Original type .................................................................................................................................... Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................................................................... Resolution ....................................................................................................................................... File type ........................................................................................................................................... Density............................................................................................................................................. Separate scan ................................................................................................................................. Color (Quality adjustment)............................................................................................................... Background removal (Quality adjustment) ...................................................................................... Sharpness (Quality adjustment) ...................................................................................................... Frame erase (Erase)......................................................................................................................... Book copy (Book scan) ................................................................................................................... Scan size (Application) .................................................................................................................... Annotation (Application) .................................................................................................................. Date/Time (Application) ................................................................................................................... Page number (Application) .............................................................................................................. Stamp (Application) ......................................................................................................................... Header/Footer (Application) ............................................................................................................ Send & Print (Application) ............................................................................................................... Document name .............................................................................................................................. Original settings............................................................................................................................... E-Mail setting .................................................................................................................................. URL notification setting................................................................................................................... E-Mail encryption ............................................................................................................................ Digital signature............................................................................................................................... Settings that can be specified from utility mode ....................................................................... Utility mode parameters .................................................................................................................. Other related parameters ................................................................................................................ PageScope Web Connection .......................................................................................................... Registering an address book destination ................................................................................... E-Mail destination............................................................................................................................ User box .......................................................................................................................................... PC (SMB)......................................................................................................................................... FTP .................................................................................................................................................. WebDAV ..........................................................................................................................................
5-36 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-39 5-41 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-48 5-49 5-49 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-56 5-58 5-58 5-61 5-64 5-67 5-72 5-73 5-75 5-77 5-78 5-79 5-79 5-80 5-80 5-80 5-80 5-81 5-81 5-83 5-84 5-88 5-91
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
Registering a group destination .................................................................................................. 5-94
PageScope Web Connection Operations

6.1 Information tab ................................................................................................................................ 6-3 Device Information - Configuration Summary................................................................................... 6-3 Device Information - Option .............................................................................................................. 6-4 Device Information - Consumables................................................................................................... 6-5 Device Information - Meter Count..................................................................................................... 6-6 Online Assistance.............................................................................................................................. 6-7 Change User Password .................................................................................................................... 6-7 Function Permission Information ...................................................................................................... 6-9 Network Setting Information ........................................................................................................... 6-10 Print Setting Information ................................................................................................................. 6-11 Print Information.............................................................................................................................. 6-12 Job tab............................................................................................................................................ Current Jobs.................................................................................................................................... Job History ...................................................................................................................................... Communication List ........................................................................................................................ 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-15
6.2
Contents-7
6.3
Box tab............................................................................................................................................ Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ Document operations ...................................................................................................................... Changing user box settings............................................................................................................. Create User Box .............................................................................................................................. Open System User Box ................................................................................................................... Create System User Box .................................................................................................................
6-16 6-16 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-25
6.4 6.5
Direct Print tab............................................................................................................................... 6-27 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 6-27 Store Address tab.......................................................................................................................... Address Book .................................................................................................................................. Registering a destination ................................................................................................................. Group............................................................................................................................................... Registering a group destination....................................................................................................... Program ........................................................................................................................................... Registering a program destination .................................................................................................. Temporary One-Touch .................................................................................................................... Subject............................................................................................................................................. Text.................................................................................................................................................. 6-28 6-28 6-29 6-34 6-35 6-37 6-38 6-55 6-56 6-57
Fax Operations (Option)

7.1 7.2 General fax operation...................................................................................................................... 7-3 Sending a fax..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 Loading the original......................................................................................................................... Loading the original in the ADF ......................................................................................................... Loading the original on the original glass .......................................................................................... Faxing a multi-page original using the original glass......................................................................... Sending the original using both the ADF and the original glass........................................................ 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-8
7.3
Specifying scanning conditions ..................................................................................................... 7-9 Specifying scanning settings............................................................................................................. 7-9 Original type..................................................................................................................................... 7-10 Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................................................................... 7-10 Resolution........................................................................................................................................ 7-11 Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-12 Specifying only one destination ................................................................................................... Specifying from registered destinations .......................................................................................... Searching for a registered destination (Index button) ..................................................................... Searching for a registered destination (Address type) .................................................................... Searching for registered destinations (Detail search) ...................................................................... Specifying by direct input ................................................................................................................ Specifying from the job history........................................................................................................ 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 7-15 7-17 7-18
7.4
7.5
Specifying multiple destinations (Sequential broadcast transmission or broadcast transmission) 7-19 Specifying multiple destinations (from registered destinations, direct input, job history) ............... 7-19 Specifying multiple destinations (using the group button) .............................................................. 7-19 Sending a fax using a program destination ................................................................................ 7-21 To send a fax after specifying a program destination ..................................................................... 7-21 Operations while scanning ........................................................................................................... If original size cannot be detected................................................................................................... When there is a memory overflow ................................................................................................... Original auto rotation ....................................................................................................................... When unable to send..................................................................................................................... Redial............................................................................................................................................... Auto redial function.......................................................................................................................... Manual redial (Current jobs list) ....................................................................................................... Manual redial (Fax retransmit user box) .......................................................................................... Reserving a transmission ............................................................................................................. Aborting transmission ................................................................................................................... Aborting a job during transmission.................................................................................................. Canceling timer transmission reserved jobs.................................................................................... 7-23 7-23 7-23 7-23 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-26 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-29
7.6 7.7
7.8
7.9 7.10
Contents-8
7.11
Sending a fax after specifying a time (Timer TX)........................................................................ 7-30 To conduct timer TX........................................................................................................................ 7-30
Network Fax Operations (Option)

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 General fax operation (Internet fax)............................................................................................... 8-3 Sending an internet fax ..................................................................................................................... 8-3 General fax operation (IP address fax) .......................................................................................... 8-7 Sending an IP address fax ................................................................................................................ 8-7 Specifying transmission color settings (IP address fax) ........................................................... 8-10 Specifying transmission color settings............................................................................................ 8-10 Specifying the scan conditions .................................................................................................... Specifying scan settings ................................................................................................................. Original type .................................................................................................................................... Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................................................................... Resolution ....................................................................................................................................... Density............................................................................................................................................. Specifying only one destination ................................................................................................... Specifying from registered destination ........................................................................................... Searching the registered destination (Search text button).............................................................. Searching the registered destination (Address type) ...................................................................... Searching the registered destination (Detail search)....................................................................... Specifying by direct input................................................................................................................ 8-11 8-11 8-11 8-12 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-14 8-15 8-15 8-16 8-18
8.5
8.6
Specifying multiple destinations (Broadcast transmission)...................................................... 8-20 Specifying multiple destinations (by registered destination and direct input)................................. 8-20 Specifying multiple destinations (by group button)......................................................................... 8-21 Send a fax with program destination .......................................................................................... 8-22 Sending a fax after specifying program destination ....................................................................... 8-22 When unable to send .................................................................................................................... Redial .............................................................................................................................................. Auto redial function ......................................................................................................................... Redial confirmation screen.............................................................................................................. Manual redial (Current jobs list)....................................................................................................... 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-24 8-25
8.7 8.8
8.9 8.10
Reserving the transmission.......................................................................................................... 8-26 Stopping the transmission ........................................................................................................... 8-27 Stopping during transmission ......................................................................................................... 8-27
Appendix
9.1 Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 9-3 Enlarging the keyboard ..................................................................................................................... 9-4 To type text ....................................................................................................................................... 9-5
10
Index
Contents-9
Contents-10
Introduction
Introduction
1 Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine. This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this manual before using the machine. The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment.
1.1
Energy Star
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. What is an ENERGY STAR product? An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.
1-3
1
1.2 Explanation of manual conventions
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below. Safety advices
Introduction
6 DANGER
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power. % Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.
7 WARNING
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property damage. % Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
7 CAUTION
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property damage. % Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
Sequence of action
1 2
The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a sequence of actions. Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent steps of a sequence of actions.
Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance. % Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the desired results are achieved.
An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed.
Tips
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information.
Special text markings [Stop] key The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above. MACHINE SETTING Display texts are written as shown above.
1-4
Introduction
1
2
Note
The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration.
1-5
1
1.3 Descriptions and symbols for originals and paper
The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below. "Width" and "Length" Whenever paper dimensions are mentioned in this manual, the first value always refers to the width of the paper (shown as "Y" in the illustration) and the second to the length (shown as "X").
Introduction
Paper orientation Lengthwise (w) If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w.
Crosswise (v) If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v.
1-6
Introduction
1
Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of originals must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such originals off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments Personal checks Travelers checks Money orders Certificates of deposit Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Legal Originals Food stamps Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) Passports Immigration papers Motor vehicle licenses and titles House and property titles and deeds General Identification cards, badges, or insignias Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of an original, consult with legal counsel.
1.4
!
Detail
In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain originals, such as paper currency, this machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature. Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may be distorted.
1-7
1
1.5 Safety information
Introduction
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this manual. KM_Ver.01E_C
2
Note
Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product.
Warning and precaution symbols The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety warnings.
7 WARNING
Ignoring these warnings could cause serious injury or even death. % Do not ignore these safety advices.
7 CAUTION
Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property. % Do not ignore these safety advices.
Meaning of symbols
Symbol Meaning A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution. A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action. A black circle indicates an imperative course of action. Example Meaning This symbol warns against possible causes of burns. This symbol warns against dismantling the device. This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.
Disassemble and modification
7 WARNING
Warning Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness. Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness.
Symbol
1-8
Introduction Power cord
7 WARNING
Warning Use only the power cord supplied in the package. If a power cord is not supplied, only use the power cord and plug that is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock. Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this machine and NEVER use it for any other product. Failure to observe this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown. Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
Symbol
Power source
7 WARNING
Warning Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock. Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician for the installation. Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock. Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord is required. Consult your authorized service representative before connecting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire.
Symbol
7 CAUTION
Caution The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency occurs.
Symbol
1-9
1
Power plug
Introduction
7 WARNING
Warning Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result. Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock.
Symbol
7 CAUTION
Caution Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.
Symbol
Grounding
7 WARNING
Warning Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal.
Symbol
1-10
Introduction Installation
7 WARNING
Warning Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
Symbol
7 CAUTION
Caution After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury. Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown. Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction. Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as a fire could result.
Symbol
Ventilation
7 CAUTION
Caution Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals.
Symbol
1-11
1
Actions in response to troubles
Introduction
7 WARNING
Warning Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. Do not keep using this product, if this product has been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
Symbol
7 CAUTION
Caution The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature, which may cause burns. When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a "Caution HOT" caution label.
Symbol
Consumables
7 WARNING
Warning Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an open flame. The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage.
Symbol
7 CAUTION
Caution Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place within easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health. Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these products to malfunction.
Symbol
1-12
Introduction When moving the machine
7 CAUTION
Caution Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified in the user manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe personal injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction.
Symbol
Before successive holidays When the optional Fax Kit FK-502 is not installed:
7 CAUTION
Caution Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long periods of time.
Symbol
1-13
1
1.6 Regulation notices
CE Marking (Declaration of Conformity) for users of the European Union (EU) This product complies with the following EU directives: 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives. This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
Introduction
This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules. User Instructions FCC Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices (for U.S.A. users) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations. % This device must be used with a shielded network cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules.
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (for Canada users) This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. For users in countries not subject to class B regulations
7 WARNING
Interference with radio communications: % This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. % This device must be used with a shielded network cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR rules and local rules.
Laser safety This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the instructions in this manual. Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
1-14
Introduction Internal laser radiation

Specification Maximum average radiation power bizhub C451/C550: 12.9 W at the laser aperture of the print head unit bizhub C650: 15.2 W at the laser aperture of the print head unit 775-800 nm
Wavelength
7 WARNING
This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. % The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit. % The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM: Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.
Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit
Print Head
CDRH regulations This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The label shown on page 1-17 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
7 CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 30 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
1-15
1
For European users
Introduction
7 CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. % This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 30 mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
For Denmark users
7 ADVARSEL
Dette er en halvlederlaser. % Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undg udsttelse for strling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825 sikkerheds kravene. Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens hjeste styrke er 30 mW og blgelngden er 775-800 nm. For Finland, Sweden users LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
7 VAROITUS
Tm on puolijohdelaser. % Laitteen Kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle. Tm on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 30 mW ja aallonpituus on 775-800 nm.
7 VARNING
Det hr r en halvledarlaser. % Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1. Det hr r en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden r 30 mW och vglngden r 775-800 nm.
7 VAROITUS
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina nkymttmlle lasersteilylle. % l katso steeseen.
7 VARNING
Osynlig laserstrlning nr denna del r ppnad och sprren r urkopplad. % Betrakta ej strlen.
1-16
Introduction For Norway users
7 ADVARSEL!
Dette en halvleder laser. % Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstrling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 30 mW og blgelengde er 775-800 nm. Laser safety label A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine, as shown below.
* Only for the U.S.A.
Ozone release
7 CAUTION
Locate the machine in a well ventilated room % A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy, and safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room well ventilated.
7 ATTENTION
Placer lappareil dans une pice largement ventile. % Une quantit dozone ngligable est dgage pendant le fonctionnement de lappareil quand celui-ci est utilis normalement. Cependant, une odeur dsagrable peut tre ressentie dans les pices dont laration est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolonge de lappareil est effectue. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement runissant des conditions de confort, sant et de scurit, il est prfrable de bien arer la pice ou se trouve lappareil.
1-17
1
Acoustic noise (for European users only)
Introduction
Maschinenlrminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der hchste Schalldruckpegel betrgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gem EN ISO 7779. For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please refer to the information of your local community or contact our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-of-life electric and electronic equipments. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive. This device is not intended for use at a video workstation in compliance with BildscharbV. Das Gert ist nicht fur die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen.
1-18
Introduction
1
Caution notations and labels
Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the following positions. Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as removing paper misfeeds are performed.
1.7
1-19
1
1.8 Space requirements
Introduction
To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replacement, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
807
958
387
392
1130
50
C451/C550/C650+FS-608+LU-301(+PI-503)
1155
494
Unit: mm
191
555
958
387
392
1130
50
C451+FS-519+SD-505+LU-301
1155
494
Unit: mm
2
Reminder
Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm or more at the back of this machine for the ventilation duct.
1-20
Introduction
1
Options
The following table shows the available options for bizhub C451, bizhub C550 as well as bizhub C650.
Option Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 Working table WT-502 Fax multi line ML-501 Image controller IC-409 Mount kit MK-715 Large capacity unit LU-301 Finisher FS-517 Finisher FS-519 Finisher FS-608 Punch kit PK-510 Punch kit PK-512 Punch kit PK-513 Post inserter PI-503 Job separator JS-504 Output tray OT-602 Output tray OT-503 Mailbin kit MT-502 Saddle stitcher SD-505 Video interface kit VI-504 Fax kit FK-502 Stamp unit SP-501 Scan accelerator kit SA-501 Security kit SC-503 Local interface kit EK-603 bizhub C451 o o o o o o o o o o o o o e o o o o o o o o o o o bizhub C550 o o o o o e o o e o e o o o e e o e e o o o o o o bizhub C650 o o o o o e o o e o e o o o e e o e e o (Standard) o o o (Standard) o o
1.9
o: Available e: Not available
1-21
1
1.10 Operation precautions
Introduction
To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precautions described below. Power source The power source requirements are as follows. Voltage fluctuation: Maximum 10% (at 220 to 240 V AC) Frequency fluctuation: Maximum 3 Hz (at 50 Hz) Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as possible. Operating environment The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as follows. Temperature: 10C (50F) to 30C (86F) with fluctuations of no more than 10C (18F) within an hour Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an hour Storage of copies To store copies, follow the recommendation listed below. Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading. Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner on copies. Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-white copies. Therefore, when a color copy is folded, the toner at the fold may peel off.
1-22
Introduction
1
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License Copyright 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Youngs, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-soft.com)" The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
1.11
1-23
Introduction THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
1-24
Introduction
1
Software licence agreement
This package contains the following materials provided by Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system, the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form ("Font Programs"), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software ("Host Software"), and related explanatory written materials ("Documentation"). The term "Software" shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output de-vice(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 ("Printing Software") above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols ("Typefaces") on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensees right and interest to such Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owners name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.
1.12
1-25
Introduction
1-26
Copy Operations
Copy Operations
2
2.1
Copy Operations
Control panel
1
2 3
4 22 21 20 19 6 18 17 16 15 7 8 5
14
13 12 11
10
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Part name Touch panel Main Power indicator [Power] (auxiliary power) key [Mode Memory] key [Utility/Counter] key [Reset] key [Interrupt] key
Description Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch. Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy. Press to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered program. (See p. 2-70) Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen. Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel. Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number of copies. Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, copying cannot begin. Press to restart a stopped job.
8 9 10
[Stop] key [Proof Copy] key [Start] key
2-3
2
No. 11 Part name Data indicator Description
Copy Operations
Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being printed. The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data. Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad. Use to type in the number of copies to be produced. Use to type in the zoom ratio. Use to type in the various settings. Press to display the Help Menu screen. From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be displayed. (See p. 2-75) Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions. Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine. Use to adjust the Brighthess of the touch panel. Press to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green. Press to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green.
12 13
[C] (clear) key Keypad
14
[Help] key
15 16 17
[Enlarge Display] key [Accessibility] key [Power Save] key
18
[Access] key
19 20
[Brightness] dial [User Box] key
21
[Fax/Scan] key
22
[Copy] key
2
Reminder
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel.
2-4
Copy Operations
2.2
Basic settings screens

When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears. % To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel.
Basic screen
10 9
7 6 5 4
Quick Copy screen
10
7 5
2-5
2
% Touch
Copy Operations to display the Color settings, [Finishing] and [Auto Rotate OFF] in the left panel.
No. 1 2
Item Name Message display area Functions/settings display area
Description The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed. Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed. Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings. Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed. Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper. Touch to scan the document in separate batches. A document scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job. Touch to specify settings for sorting, collating, grouping, offsetting, stapling, hole punching or outputting to a specific tray. The settings that can be specified differ depending on the finisher that is installed. These indicators show the amount of toner remaining for cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). When the [Job List] button is pressed, a screen showing the jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed is displayed. When the [Check Job] button is pressed, a screen showing the result of the specified settings is displayed. The result of the specified settings is displayed. Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed. Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available.
3 4 5
Icon display area [Auto Rotate OFF] button [Separate Scan] button
[Finishing] button
7 8
Toner supply indicators Left panel
9 10
[Check Job] button [Job List] button
!
Detail
The basic settings screen (Basic screen or Quick Copy screen) that appears can be set with the "Copier Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and Quick Copy screen; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "Basic" is selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when "Basic" is selected. The Quick Copy screen displays all of the settings from the Basic screen so that many settings can easily be specified.
2-6
Copy Operations
2
Note
2
If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed settings appears framed with a green line. The green line can be changed to another color with the "Color Selection Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility mode).
2.3
Icons that appear in the screen

Icon Description Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that data is being received from the machine, regardless of the current mode. Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation. Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code. If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display the warning screen again. Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure. Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
When the optional image controller has been installed, touch this icon to display the image controller screen. Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON".
Appears when a external memory (USB memory) is connected.
2-7
2
2.4 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power
Copy Operations
This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Turning on the machine The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned on. The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves energy.
Open the main power switch cover, and then set the main power switch to "n".
2 3
Close the main power switch cover. Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned on.
!
Detail
When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears. After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued. The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the power switch is set to "n") and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the factory.
2
Note
A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on. For details, refer to "Scanning during warm-up" on page 2-9. After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed. The machine takes about 30 seconds to warm up at normal room temperature (23 C) when the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on after the main power switch is turned on.
2-8
Copy Operations Scanning during warm-up
2
Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. For details on turning on the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-10. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange. After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue.
Check that the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel.
3 4 5 6
Position the document to be copied. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key. If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in the Utility mode was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] to display the Basic screen. After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed. The document is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs. How can the job being printed be stopped? % Press the [Stop] key.
!
Detail
While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key, copy settings can be specified and a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed. The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current Jobs list in the Job List screen.
2-9
2
Turning off the machine
Copy Operations
1 2
Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key. Check that the touch panel is turned off. Open the main power switch cover, and then set the main power switch to "o".
Close the main power switch cover.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted. Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off. Settings that have not been programmed Jobs queued to be printed
Manually conserving energy The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode).
Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key). As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode.
2-10
Copy Operations Controlling each users use of this machine (User authentication)
If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered can use this machine. In addition, the number of printed pages can be managed for each user. 0 0 0 When user authentication settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified users can use this machine. Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name. If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. Touch [User Name].
If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine. If "Enhanced Security Settings" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [User Name List] do not appear.
2-11
Copy Operations If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name] appears with the name of the default server. Touch [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers, and then select the desired server.
Type in the user name, and then touch [OK].
Touch [Password].
2-12
Copy Operations
2
Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears. If account track settings have been applied, the account track screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are synchronized.
6 7
Make copies using the desired copy settings. When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The user authentication screen appears.
2
Note
The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user authentication, and then log on by using the account track screen. User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
2-13
2
Controlling each accounts use of this machine (Account track)
Copy Operations
If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled. This is account track. 0 0 0 When account track settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified accounts can use this machine. If you do not know the account name or password, contact your administrator. A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered. Touch [Account Name].
If the Administrator Settings mode settings have been set to "Password Only", touch [Password], and then continue with step 4.
Type in the account name, and then touch [OK].
2-14
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Password].
Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key. The Basic screen appears.
6 7
Make copies using the desired copy settings. When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key. A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
2-15
2
8
Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. The account track screen appears.
Copy Operations
!
Detail
The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the administrator.
2-16
Copy Operations
2
Pull out tray 1 or tray 2.
2.5
Loading paper into tray 1 and tray 2
Film
Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded.

Lateral guides
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded paper.
Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up.
, mark
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
2-17
2 ? % ?
4
How is curled paper loaded? Flatten the paper before loading it.
Copy Operations
How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Close tray 1 or tray 2.
!
Detail
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For details, refer to "Specifying a setting for special paper" on page 2-92.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film. For details on selecting the size and type of paper loaded in tray 1 and 2, refer to "Copy paper" on page 2-79. To print on OHP transparencies, envelopes or postcards, use the bypass tray.
2-18
Copy Operations
2
Pull out tray 3.
2.6
Loading paper into tray 3
Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up.
? ?
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3.
2
Reminder
For details on selecting the size and type of paper loaded in tray 3, refer to "Copy paper" on page 2-79. Do not load tray 3 with paper of a size other than that previously specified. Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands.
2
Note
To change the size of paper loaded in tray 3, contact your service representative. To print on OHP transparencies and envelopes, use the bypass tray.
2-19
2
2.7 Loading paper into tray 4
Copy Operations
Pull out tray 4.
Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces up.
? ?
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down. How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 4.
2
Reminder
For details on selecting the size and type of paper loaded in tray 4, refer to "Copy paper" on page 2-79. Do not load tray 4 with paper of a size other than that previously specified. Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your hands.
2
Note
To change the size of paper loaded in tray 4, contact your service representative. To print on OHP transparencies and envelopes, use the bypass tray.
2-20
Copy Operations
2
LCT is an option. Open the upper door.
2.8
Loading paper into the LCT

0
Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the tray. Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped) faces down.
? ?
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up. How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the upper door.
2
Reminder
For details on selecting the size and type of paper loaded in the LCT, refer to "Copy paper" on page 2-79.
2
Note
If the machine is turned off, the bottom plate cannot be raised. When loading paper into the LCT, be sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
2-21
2
2.9 Loading paper into the bypass tray
Copy Operations
Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, postcards, envelopes, OHP transparencies or label sheets.
Open the bypass tray. When loading large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension.
Tray extension
2 3
With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot. Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
? ?
How is curled paper loaded? % Flatten the paper before loading it. How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded? % Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Lateral guides
Select the paper type.
2-22
Copy Operations To print on colored paper, envelopes or letterheads, touch
2
, and then select the paper type.
If "A6Card w" is selected, the paper type is automatically set to "Thick 3". For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "Specifying a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings)" on page 2-86. For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "Selecting a setting for oversized paper ("Wide Paper" settings)" on page 2-90. For details on special paper, refer to "Special paper" on page 2-81.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The Basic screen appears again.
2
Reminder
Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper. When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load postcards in the v orientation. If media other than postcards are inserted, select the appropriate paper type. If label sheets are loaded, select "Thick 1". Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black. When selecting OHP transparencies, select the "Black" Color setting, and then select the paper type. A maximum of 50 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray.
2-23
2
A maximum of 20 OHP transparencies can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Copy Operations
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may occur. When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on. A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Flap side
2-24
Copy Operations
2
When loading label sheets, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load label sheets in the v orientation. A maximum of 50 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Side to be printed on
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up.
2
Note
The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the bypass tray.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to "Selecting a paper size setting ("Size" setting)" on page 2-84. For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 2-79.
2-25
2
2.10 Feeding the document
Copy Operations
The document can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the document correctly according to the type of document being copied.
Document Feed Method Using the ADF Features By using the ADF, a multi-page document can be fed automatically, one page at a time. This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double-sided documents. Place the document directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned. This method is best with books and other documents that cannot be fed through the ADF.
Using the original glass
Loading the document into the ADF 0 0 0 Do not load documents that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples. For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 2-95. Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur. However, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 2-28. If the document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure to select the document orientation. Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the document.
0 0
Load the document in the document feed tray in order to be scanned with the side to be scanned face up. Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine.
2-26
Copy Operations
2
Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the document.
Lateral guides
Placing the document on the original glass 0 0 For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Original documents" on page 2-95. When placing the document on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20. If the document is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20, the correct document size may not be detected. Do not place objects weighing more than 2 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the ADF. When a document is being scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass. Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore, is not as dangerous. Lift open the ADF. Place the document face down on the original glass. Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the left side of the machine.
0 0
1 2
When loaded in the v orientation
When loaded in the w orientation
20
20
Align the document with the of the document scales.
mark in the back-left corner
Original scales
2-27
2
For transparent or translucent documents, place a blank sheet of paper of the same size as the document over the document.
Blank sheet of paper
Copy Operations
For bound documents spread over two facing pages, such as a book or magazine, position the top of the document toward the back of this machine and align the document with the mark in the back-left corner of the document scales, as shown.
Close the ADF.
Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) A large document can be divided and scanned in a number of batches. A maximum of 100 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by specifying with the "Separate Scan" setting, a document that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation.
0 0
The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) or 38 sheets of thick paper (210 g/m2). The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Batch Print" is selected.
2-28
Copy Operations
2
1 2
In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].
To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it.
Press the [Start] key. After the document has been scanned, the following message appears.
Load the next batch of the document, and then press the [Start] key. If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the following screen, which appears while the document is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5.
If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Original documents" on page 2-95. To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Binding Position, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase Original Size
2-29
2
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Copy Operations
The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 2-68.
After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
Press the [Start] key. If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key.
2-30
Copy Operations
2
If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired.
Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page document on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided document pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies. 0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print". As a default, "Page Print" is selected. Lift open the ADF. Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto the original glass. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Placing the document on the original glass" on page 2-27.
1 2
When loaded in the v orientation
When loaded in the w orientation
20
20
3 4
Close the ADF. In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
2-31
2
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
Copy Operations
Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided].
Touch [Binding Position], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK]. For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "Selecting an Original > Copy setting (Duplex/Combine)" on page 2-41.
Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded document, and then touch [OK].
Touch [OK].
2-32
Copy Operations
2
Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins.
10
Position the second page or second side of the document onto the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. To scan the remaining pages in the document, repeat step 10. To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified settings. Settings for the following can be changed. 1-Sided/2-Sided, Binding Position, Zoom, Frame Erase, Center Erase Original Size To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
11
2-33
2
12
Press the [Start] key.
Copy Operations
If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the [Start] key.
If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing the settings as desired.
2-34
Copy Operations
2.11
Selecting a paper setting

The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually. Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings. As the factory default, "Auto" is selected.
2
Note
If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected with single-sided printing.) Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper tray. For details, refer to "Specifying a setting for special paper" on page 2-92. If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio. The "Auto Paper" setting cannot be combined with the "Auto Zoom" Setting.
Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) The size of the loaded document is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size. If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the document is selected. If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected.
In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
Touch [Auto].
2-35
2
3
Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again. Manually selecting the desired paper size 0
Copy Operations
By also selecting the "Auto" Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto" Zoom setting, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom setting)" on page 2-37. Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance. In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper.
Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again.
2-36
Copy Operations
2.12
Specifying a zoom setting

The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy image. As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected. The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting. Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom setting) The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. 0 0 If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the document, load the document with the same orientation as the paper. If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. Touch the button for the desired paper. In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
Touch [Auto].
2-37
2
Specifying the zoom ratio of the document ("Full Size" setting) A copy that is the same size as the document (100%) is produced. 0
Copy Operations
Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments. In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
Touch [Full Size].
2-38
Copy Operations Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)
A document image can be printed slightly smaller (93.0%) than the original document size and centered in the copy. 0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
Touch [Minimal].
2-39
2
Selecting a preset zoom ratio ("Enlarge and Reduce" settings)
Copy Operations
The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard document sizes to standard paper sizes are preset.
In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside "Enlarge" and "Reduce", depending on the document and paper sizes.
2-40
Copy Operations
2.13
Selecting an Original > Copy setting (Duplex/Combine)

The following four Original > Copy setting combinations are possible.
Original > Copy settings 1-Sided > 1-Sided Description Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents.
1-Sided > 2-Sided
Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two singlesided documents.
2-Sided > 1-Sided
Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one doublesided document.
2-Sided > 2-Sided
Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents.
2-41
2
2.14 Selecting a combined copy setting
Copy Operations
Document images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use. The following three combined copy settings are available.
!
Detail
When select the combined copy setting, copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio (recommended zoom ratio) selected for the document and paper size. The zoom ratio that is selected can be changed manually.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Auto Display Zoom Ratio" is selected. The "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not used. In that case, specify the zoom ratio manually.
Setting 2in1
Description Select this setting to print two document pages on one page. Horizontal
Vertical
4in1
Select this setting to print four document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal
Vertical
2-42
Copy Operations
2
Description Select this setting to print eight document pages on one page. The page arrangement (Numbering Direction setting) can be specified. Horizontal
Setting 8in1
Vertical
The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting. Copying multiple document pages onto a single page ("Combined Copy" settings) If a combined copy setting is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation for the document, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement.
In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
Select the desired combined copy setting.
2-43
Copy Operations Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined pages. If "4in1 / 8in1" is selected, whether the "Horizontal" or "Vertical" paper arrangement is selected can be viewed in the touch panel. However, this appears only if the "Left Pane Display Default" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Check Job Settings". If "2in1" was selected, the pages will be arranged as shown below.
Horizontal
Vertical
If "4in1 / 8in1" was selected, the 4in1/8in1 screen appears. Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] to select the page arrangement.
To cancel the setting, touch [No].
2-44
Copy Operations
2.15
Selecting the quality of the document

Loading documents with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings) Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better adjust the copy quality. The following Original Type settings are available.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Text/Photo - Printed Photo" is selected.
Icon
Description Select this setting when copying documents containing only text. The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read.
Text Select this setting when printing photos from documents containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced.
Text/Photo
Photo Paper Select this setting when copying printed documents containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or catalogs.
Printed Photo Select this setting when printing photos from documents onto photographic paper. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. A smooth copy image is produced. Photo Photo Paper Select this setting when copying printed documents, such as pamphlets or catalogs. Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone document images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings. Printed Photo Select this setting when copying documents with a background color or documents containing pencil markings or fine colored lines. A sharp copy image is produced.
Map Select this setting when copying documents containing only text that appears faint (such as that written with a pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read.
Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying images (documents) printed with this machine.
Copied Paper
2-45
2
To select an original type setting
Copy Operations
1 2
In the Basic screen, touch [Quality/Density].
The Quality/Density screen appears.
Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded document. For a document that contains only text, touch [Text].
For a document that contains both text and photos, touch [Text/Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK].
2-46
Copy Operations
2
For a document that contains photos, touch [Photo] to display the Photo Type screen. Touch the button for the appropriate setting, and then touch [OK].
For a document that contains maps, touch [Map]. For a document that contains faint text, touch [Dot Matrix Original]. For a document printed with this machine, touch [Copied Paper].
The Quality/Density screen appears again.
2-47
2
2.16 Selecting finishing settings
Copy Operations
Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Group" is selected.
!
Detail
If no finisher or separator is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
2
Note
From Administrator Settings mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being shifted when the finisher or the separator is installed. As a factory default, the machine is set to shift the copies that are fed out. For details on "Fold/Bind" and "Center Staple/Fold", refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 2-60.
2
Note
If the post inserter has been installed onto the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually.
The following Finishing settings are available.
Setting Sort Description Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page document.
Group
Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page document.
2-48
Copy Operations
2
Description If no finisher or separator is installed If the sorting conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern.
Setting Offset
If a finisher or separator is installed The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it.
Fold/Bind
Select one of these settings to fold copies. The copies can also be bound with staples at the same time.
A Fold/Bind setting can be used if optional finisher FS-608 is installed. Center Staple/Fold Select this setting to fold copies. The copies can also be bound with staples at the same time.
The "Center Staple & Fold" setting can be used if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional finisher FS-519. Output Tray Staple Select the output tray where the finished copies are to be fed. This setting can be used if optional finisher FS-519 is installed. Select one of these settings to bind the copies with a staple in the corner or with two staples.
2-49
2
Setting Punch Description Holes are punched (4 holes) in the copies for filing them.
Copy Operations
Available Finishing settings
Center Staple & Fold
Standard FS-517 FS-517 + Punch kit FS-608 FS-608 + Punch kit FS-519 FS-519 + Punch kit FS-519 + Punch kit + Saddle stitcher FS-519 + Punch kit + Mailbin Separator
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o o o o
e o o o o o o o o e
e e o e o e o o o e
e e e o o e e o e e
e e e o o e e o e e
e e e o o e e e e e
o: Possible e: Not possible
2
Note
Available finishers for bizhub C550 and C650: FS-517 and FS-608 Available finisher for bizhub C451: FS-517, FS-519 and FS-608 For more information on available options see "Options" on page 1-21.
2-50
Select Ouput Tray e e e e e o o o o o
Half-Fold
Tri-Fold
Punch
Staple
Group
Offset
Sort
Copy Operations The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings.
2
Reminder
The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting) 0 0 0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected. If finisher FS-519 is installed, the output tray can be selected. For details, refer to"Selecting the output tray" on page 2-53. If offset sorting is selected while no finisher or separator is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. If offset sorting is selected while a finisher ot separator is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
Touch [Sort].
To separate each set of copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset".
2-51
2
Separating copies by pages ("Group" setting) 0 0 0
Copy Operations
As the factory default, "Group" is selected. If finisher FS-519 is installed, the output tray can be selected. For details, refer to"Selecting the output tray" on page 2-53. If offset sorting is selected while no finisher or separator is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met. A4- or B5-size paper is used. Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray. The "Auto" Paper setting is selected. The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected. If offset sorting is selected while a finisher ot separator is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted to separate it. In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
Touch [Group].
To separate each set of pages, touch [Yes] under "Offset".
2-52
Copy Operations Selecting the output tray 0 The output tray can be selected only if optional finisher FS-519 is installed. In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
Touch [Output Tray].
Select the output tray where copies are to be fed, and then touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
2-53
2
Stapling copies ("Staple" settings)
Copy Operations
!
Detail
If a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected. A Staple setting cannot be used together with offset sorting. If a Staple setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned and the orientation of the page to be stapled, otherwise the copies may not be stapled as desired.
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places. When Finisher FS-517/FS-608 is installed
!
Detail
In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 311.1 mm. The paper length must be between 139 mm and 457.2 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have paper of the same paper width.
Tray Output tray 1
Paper weight Plain paper (64 g/m to 90 g/m2) Thick paper 1/1+/2 (91 g/m2 to 209 g/m2)*1
2
Paper size A3 w to A5 v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*2, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K w/v, 8K w
Paper capacity 20 to 50 sets (A3 w, 11 e 17 w, A5 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v) 20 to 100 sets (others)
*1 *2 *3
Can only be used as cover sheets. Can be used only with Finisher FS-608.
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact your technical representative. Number of bound pages Examples of the possible number of bound pages are listed below.
Finisher FS-517: 50 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper 2 sheets of 200 g/m2 paper + 48 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper Finisher FS-608: 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper 2 sheets of 200 g/m2 paper + 48 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper 16 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper 2 sheets of 200 g/m2 paper + 14 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper
2
Reminder
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed.
2-54
Copy Operations When Finisher FS-519 is installed
!
Detail
In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 148.5 mm and 431.8 mm. If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must be printed with paper of the same width.
Tray Finishing tray 1 Finishing tray 2
Paper weight Plain paper (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Plain paper (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Paper size A3 w to A5 v A3 w to A5 v
Loading Capacity When the stack is 32 mm high or contains 200 sheets or 20 sets A4 w or smaller: 132 mm high, 1,000 sheets or 100 sets B4 w or larger: When the stack is 64.5 mm high or contains 500 sheets or 50 sets When the stack is 24 mm high or contains 200 sheets or 20 sets
Optional finishing tray
Plain paper (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
A3 w to A5 v
Possible number of bound pages: 50 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper
In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position].
To cancel the Staple setting, touch [None].
2-55
2
3
Touch [Position Setting].
Copy Operations
Select the stapling position, and then touch [OK]. When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected.
When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected.
Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled. If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the document with the top toward the back of the machine. If the document is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
4 5
If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the document. Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again.
2-56
Copy Operations Punching holes in copies ("Punch" settings)
!
Detail
In order for holes to be punched in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 280 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm. If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the document is positioned. If an Original Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired.
2
Note
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
When Punch kit PK-512 is installed on Finisher FS-517/FS-608
Tray Finishing Tray 1 Paper weight 64 g/m to 128 g/m
2 2
Paper size "4-Hole" Punch setting: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v
When Punch kit PK-513 is installed on Finisher FS-517/FS-608

Tray Finishing Tray 1 Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Paper size "4-Hole" Punch setting: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v
When Finisher FS-519 is installed

Paper weight Plain Paper (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Thick Paper 1/1+/2 (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Paper size A3 w, A4 v, B5 v
2-57
2
1
Copy Operations
Under "Punch", touch [4-Hole].
To cancel the Punch setting, touch [None].
Touch [Position Setting].
2-58
Copy Operations Select the punched hole position, and then touch [OK].
Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the orientation of the loaded document. If the document length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched along the long side of the paper. If the document length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched along the short side of the paper. If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the document with the top toward the back of the machine. If the document is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly positioned. If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
4 5
If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the document. Touch [OK]. The Basic screen appears again.
2-59
2
2.17 Selecting a folding setting
Copy Operations
If options are installed, copies can be folded before being fed out. The following folding settings are available. The available settings differ depending on the options that are installed.
Setting Description Compatible models bizhub C451 Half-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 2-60.) FS-608 FS-519 + Saddle Stitcher bizhub C550/C650 FS-608
Center Staple & Fold
Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to page 2-63.)
FS-608 FS-519 + Saddle Stitcher
FS-608
Tri-Fold
Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out. (Refer to page 2-66.)
FS-608
FS-608
2
Note
Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if a finisher is installed.
Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) When Finisher FS-608 is installed
Paper weight Plain paper (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) Paper size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w
Maximum number of folded sheets 3 sheets
Paper capacity When folding 3 sheets: 25 sets or less (with a paper length of 299 mm or less) 33 sets or less (others)
2-60
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Fold/Bind].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
Touch [Half-Fold].
As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when "Half-Fold" is selected. To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again.
2-61
2
When the saddle stitcher is installed on finisher FS-519
Paper weight Plain Paper (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Paper size B5 w, A4 w, B4 w, A3 w
Copy Operations
Maximum number of folded sheets 200 sheets or 20 sets
Possible number of sheets folded in half: 2 to 15 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages)
!
Detail
In order for copies to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 257 mm and 431.8 mm.
Touch [Center Staple/Fold].
The Center Staple/Fold screen appears.
2-62
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Yes] below "Half-Fold".
As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when Half-Fold is selected. To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting) When Finisher FS-608 is installed
Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 81 g/m to 90 g/m
2 2
Paper size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w
Maximum number of bound sheets 20 sheets 16 sheets
2-63
2
2
Touch [Fold/Bind].
Copy Operations
Touch [Center Staple & Fold].
If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2) cannot be stapled. When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following factory default settings are automatically selected. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio (70.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch To cancel the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
2-64
Copy Operations When the saddle stitcher is installed on finisher FS-519

Paper weight Plain Paper (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2) Paper size B5 w, A4 w, B4 w, A3 w Maximum number of folded sheets 200 sheets or 20 sets
Possible number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets of 90 g/m2 paper (maximum of 60 pages)
!
Detail
In order for copies to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm. The paper length must be between 257 mm and 431.8 mm.
Touch [Center Staple/Fold].
The Center Staple/Fold screen appears.
2-65
2
3
Specify the settings for binding pages.
Copy Operations
To staple copies at the center in two places, touch [Yes] below "Center Staple" and [No] below "Half-Fold". To bind copies at the center, touch [Yes] below "Center Staple" and [Yes] below "Half-Fold".
If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (200 g/m2) cannot be stapled. When the "Center Staple" and "Half-Fold" settings are selected, the following factory default settings are automatically selected. 1-Sided > 2-Sided Booklet Recommended zoom ratio (70.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected When the "Center Staple" and "Half-Fold" settings are selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch To cancel the "Center Staple" and "Half-Fold" settings, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting) When Finisher FS-608 is installed

Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Paper size A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w Maximum number of tri-folded sheets 1 sheet
Number of folded sheets 1 sheet
Maximum number of sets 50 sets or more
!
Detail
When copies are to be folded in three, settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside.
2-66
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Fold/Bind].
Touch [Tri-Fold].
When the "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available. Group Offset Staple Punch To cancel the "Tri-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
2-67
2
2.18 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing
Copy Operations
Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the document and stop the printing operation. 0 If a document is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning. Press the [Stop] key while a document is being scanned or a job is being printed. Scanning/printing stops.
The Stopped Jobs screen appears.
To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key.
2-68
Copy Operations
2.19
Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)

The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy.
1 2
Position the document to be copied. For details on loading the document, refer to "Loading the document into the ADF" on page 2-26.
Press the [Interrupt] key. If a job is being printed, the message "The job is stopping." appears. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops. What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is pressed? % When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and settings are reset to their defaults.
? ? %
3 4 5
Why is the [Interrupt] key not available? The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned.
Select the desired copy settings. Press the [Start] key. Printing for the interrupting job begins. After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off. The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted.
2
Note
If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts.
2-69
2
2.20 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)
Copy Operations
Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled. A maximum of 30 programs can be registered. A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs.
Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy program.
?
2
Can the current settings be checked? % To check the currently specified copy settings, touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears.
From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen, touch the button where you wish to store the copy settings, and then touch [Register Program]. There are three Recall Copy Program screens. Touch and to display a different screen. If 30 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program.
The Register Copy Program screen appears.
2-70
Copy Operations
2
Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the copy program. The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
After typing in the name, touch [OK].
The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered. To stop specifying the name of the copy program, touch [Cancel]. The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the entered copy program name appears.
Can the copy program name be corrected? % To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure to change the copy program name.
2-71
2 ? %
6
Copy Operations Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked? To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then touch [Check Program Settings]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)" on page 2-73.
Touch [OK] or [Cancel]. To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key.
!
Detail
To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled. Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed. The settings of a copy program cannot be changed. If the copy program that was selected has been locked, [Edit Name] and [Delete] do not appear.
2-72
Copy Operations
2.21
Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)

Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying.
1 2
Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Copy Program screen appears.
Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled.
If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, continue with step 8. If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy program is displayed.
Press the [Check Program Settings] key. The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens.
The Check Job Settings screen appears. There are six Check Job Settings screens. The number to the right of the screen title indicates the number of the currently displayed screen. To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ].
2-73
2
5 6
Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program. Touch [Close].
Copy Operations
The Recall Copy Program screen appears again.
Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled. If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy program being recalled.
8 9
Touch [OK]. The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again. Press the [Start] key. Copying begins with the recalled copy settings.
2
Note
To stop recalling a copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key or touch [Cancel].
2-74
Copy Operations
2.22
Displaying function descriptions (Help)

Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed. There are two methods for displaying the Help screens. Main Help screens (from the Basic screen) Help screens for settings (from screens other than the Basic screen) Overview of help screens The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen.
Help Menu screen (1st level)
Item [Function] [Search by Operation] [Function Map] [Name and Function of Parts] [Service/Admin. Information]
Description Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function types and names. Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the operations. Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available functions and settings. Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part. Use to check the description of the main unit and its options. Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator.
!
Detail
The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed. While scanning, while printing, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available. [Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display] Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item. To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [Close]. Touch [Exit] to exit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was pressed.
2-75
2
Help screen (2nd level) (Example: Function)
Copy Operations
Item [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Job List]
Description Displays the first Help screen for each description.
!
Detail
The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the options that are installed. Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Function % Copy % Color)
Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Search by Operation % Copying % Selecting the Color % Copy same color as original)
Touch [Set this function] to set the selected function.
2-76
Copy Operations
Function Map screen (Example: Copy)
A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps. Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view.
!
Detail
There are 13 Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the 13 screens that is currently displayed. To display the previous screen, touch . To display the next screen, touch .
Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen. To display the Help screen for "Function" that contains the selected item, touch [Close] in the Help screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen. To quit the Help mode, press the [Help] key or touch [Exit].
Displaying main help screens As an example, the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations by using "Function".
With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key. The Help Menu screen appears.
Touch [Function] or press the [1] key in the keypad.
2-77
Copy Operations
?
3
The Help screen for "Function" appears. Is there more information about the buttons of the Help screens? % Refer to "Overview of help screens" on page 2-75.
Touch [Copy] or [Open] or press the [1] key in the keypad.
The Copy Help screen appears.
Touch [Open] or the right of the desired information, or press the key in the keypad for the number to the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen.
After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key again. The Basic screen appears again.
2-78
Copy Operations
2.23
Copy paper
Use paper that meets the following specifications. Possible paper sizes Non-standard-sized paper:
Paper source Bypass tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT Double-sided copies
*1
*1
Paper width 90.0 mm to 311.1 mm
Paper length 139.7 mm to 457.2 mm
139.7 mm to 311.1 mm
148 mm to 457.2 mm
Banner paper (bizhub C451) Paper width: 210 mm to 297 mm Paper length: 457 mm to 1200 mm Standard-sized paper:
Paper source Bypass tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT Double-sided copies
*1 *2
Paper size A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*2, 16K w/v, 8K w A3 w to A5 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 8-1/2 e 11 v, 8 e 13 w*2, 16K v, 8K w A4 v, B5 v*3, A5 v*3, 8-1/2 e 11 v*3, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v*3, 16K v*3, A6 card w*3
A4 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v*3 A3 w to A5 w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w, A6 card w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2, 8 e 13 w*2, 16K w/v, 8K w
12 e 18 is equivalent to 304.8 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact your technical representative.
*3
The setting must be changed by the technical representative.

Paper sizes that can be loaded <Finishing Tray 1> A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*2, 16K w/v, 8K w Staple: A3 w to A5 v/ w, 12-1/4 e 18 w*3, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8- 1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*2, 16K w/v, 8K w Punch Settings (PK-512)*4: "4-Hole" Punch setting: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w, 16K v Punch Settings (PK-513)*4: "4-Hole" Punch setting: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v <Finishing Tray 2> A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w*2 <Finishing Tray 3>*3 Half-Fold: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12- 1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8- 1/2 e 14 w, 8- 1/2 e 11 w, 8K w Center Staple and Fold: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8- 1/2 e 11 w, 8K w Tri-fold: A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w
Loaded equipment Finisher FS-517 Finisher FS-608
2-79
2
Loaded equipment Finisher FS-519 Output Tray OT-602 Paper sizes that can be loaded Finishing tray 1, 2 and optional Output Tray A3 w to B5 w, A6 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w "Group"/"Sort" settings: A3 w to A5 v Staple settings: A3 w to A5 v Punch settings: A3 w, A4 v, B5 w*4 Fold & staple: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w A4 v, B5 v, A5 w
Copy Operations
Saddle Stitcher SD-505 Mailbin Kit MT-502 Job separator JS-504 Output tray OT-503
*1 *2
Finishing tray 1 and finishing tray 2 A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 12- 1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 12- 1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w*1 to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 e 13 w *2, 16K w/v, 8K w
12 e 18 is equivalent to 304.8 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For details, contact your technical representative. Can be used only with Finisher FS-608. Can be used when the optional Punch kit is installed on the finisher.
*3 *4
Paper types and paper capacities

Paper type Weight Paper source Bypass tray Tray 1 and tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT 150 sheets 500 sheets 1500 sheets 1000 sheets 3000 sheets 100 sheets 400 sheets 1150 sheets 750 sheets 2500 sheets 80 sheets 280 sheets 800 sheets 500 sheets 1750 sheets 70 sheets 250 sheets 700 sheets 450 sheets 1550 sheets 60 sheets 200 sheets 600 sheets 400 sheets 1300 sheets 50 sheets Plain paper 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 Thick paper 1 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 Thick paper 1+ 121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2 Thick paper 2 158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 Thick paper 3 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 Thick paper 4 257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Paper type Paper source Bypass tray Tray 1 and Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT
*1 *2
Transparencies
Postcards
Envelopes
Label sheets
Banner paper (bizhub C451)*2 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2
20 sheets
50 sheets 200 sheets*1 200 sheets

*1
10 sheets
50 sheets
1 sheet
The setting must be changed by the technical representative. The setting can be specified when using printing functions.
2-80
Copy Operations Special paper
Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored paper. If the paper type is not correctly selected, paper misfeeds may occur.
Paper type Single Side Only Icon Descriptions Select this setting when paper that should not be used with doublesided copying (for example, when one side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with the "Single Side Only" setting selected is given priority when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during double-sided printing. Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when paper already printed with a company name or preset text is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when colored paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when OHP transparencies are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. When selecting OHP transparencies, select the "Black" Color setting, and then select the paper type. Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 91 g/m2 to 120 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. Select these settings when envelopes are loaded. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Special Paper
Letterhead
Colored Paper
Transparency
Thick 1
Thick 1+
Thick 2
Thick 3
Thick 4
Envelopes
2-81
2
Paper type Duplex 2nd Side Plain Paper Icon Descriptions
Copy Operations
Thick 1
Select these settings when loading paper that has already been printed on one side. "2nd Side" can be selected only if plain paper, thick paper 1, thick paper 1+, thick paper 2, thick paper 3 or thick paper 4 is loaded in the bypass tray.
Thick 1+
Thick 2
Thick 3
Thick 4
2-82
Copy Operations
2.24
Selecting the paper settings

This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in each paper tray.
!
Detail
For details on loading the paper into tray 1 and tray 2, refer to "Loading paper into tray 1 and tray 2" on page 2-17. For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-22.
Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting) The size of the paper loaded into tray 1 and the bypass tray can be detected automatically. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for automatically detecting the paper loaded into tray 1.
Touch the button for tray 1. To select the automatic paper detection setting for tray 2 or the bypass tray, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray.
Touch [Change Tray Settings].
2-83
2
4
Touch [Auto Detect].
Copy Operations
As the factory default, "Auto Detect" is selected.
Selecting a paper size setting ("Size" setting) The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size. This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such as with postcards or paper in inch sizes). The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for postcards loaded into the bypass tray.
Select the button for the bypass tray.
2-84
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Change Tray Settings]. Touch [Standard Size].
3 4
The Standard Size screen appears.
Touch
twice, and then touch [A6Cardw].
Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. If "A6Cardw" is selected, "Thick 3" is automatically selected. If paper other than postcards are loaded, change the paper type setting. For details on the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a setting for special paper" on page 2-92.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again. The paper size for the bypass tray is set.
2
Reminder
If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected.
!
Detail
For tray 1 and tray 2, "12-1/4 e 18 w" is available.
2-85
2
Specifying a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings) Non-standard-sized paper can be loaded into the bypass tray. If wide paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size.
Copy Operations
3 4
Touch [Change Tray Settings]. Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen appears.
2-86
Copy Operations
2
Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper. Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X (between 139.7 mm and 457.2 mm). Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y (between 90.0 mm and 311.1 mm). If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Can paper sizes be stored? % Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. % To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key. % The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings)" on page 2-87. % For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings)" on page 2-87.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again.
Storing a non-standard paper size ("Custom Size" settings) Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored. Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to reenter the setting.
2-87
2
2
Copy Operations
3 4
Touch [Change Tray Settings]. Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen appears.
Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store]. Make sure that [X] is selected, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side X (between 139.7 mm and 457.2 mm). Touch [Y] to select it, and then use the keypad to type in the length of side Y (between 90.0 mm and 311.1 mm). Check the illustration in the screen for the sides that are considered X and Y. If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
2-88
Copy Operations
2
Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored.
To change the name of a memory key, touch [Change Custom Size Name], and then touch the key to be renamed.
Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again.
2-89
2
Selecting a setting for oversized paper ("Wide Paper" settings) Wide paper can be loaded into tray 1 or tray 2 or the bypass tray.
Copy Operations
Wide paper is a size larger than the standard size and allows copies of standard-sized documents to be printed so that there is no loss at the edges. For example, if A3 wide paper is used, an area up to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm can be printed, allowing the entire area of an A3-size document to be printed. If wide paper is loaded, it will be necessary to enter the paper size. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray.
Touch the button for the bypass tray. To set the paper size for tray 1 or 2, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray.
3 4
Touch [Change Tray Settings]. Touch [Wide Paper].
2-90
Copy Operations The Wide Paper screen appears.
2
Select the size of the paper to be loaded. Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed. If tray 1 or 2 is set for wide paper, the size cannot be changed.
6 7
To change the size, touch [Change Size]. The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears. Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK]. Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad to type in the size. To store a paper size of 12 e 18 w (304.8 mm e 457.2 mm), touch [12 e 18 w]. Enter values for "X" and "Y". If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. The allowable range differs depending on the paper sizes. If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for "X" and "Y", "Input error" appears, even if the values are within the allowable range. In addition, do not enter the same size for "X" and "Y". If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad to erase the value, and then specify the correct value. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available to be selected again without being typed in. In addition, the size can be changed.
2-91
2
Specifying a setting for special paper
Copy Operations
If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or special paper, is loaded in a paper tray, be sure to change the paper type setting for that tray. The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for special paper loaded into tray 1.
Touch the button for tray 1. To specify a setting for special paper for tray 1, tray 2 or tray 3 or the bypass tray, touch the button for the corresponding paper tray. If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting. However, if the paper cannot be used for double-sided printing and the "Single Side Only" setting is selected for the paper tray, that tray is given priority. The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting.
Touch [Change Tray Settings].
2-92
Copy Operations
2
Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded. Touch the button for the desired paper type.
?
5
What types of paper can be loaded in the paper tray? % There are limits on the types of paper that can be loaded in a paper tray. % If postcards were loaded, select "Thick 3".
2
Reminder
If special paper is loaded into the paper tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
!
Detail
For details on loading the paper into tray 3, refer to "Loading paper into tray 3" on page 2-19. For details on loading the paper into tray 4, refer to "Loading paper into tray 4" on page 2-20.
Printing double-sided copies manually The "Duplex 2nd Side" setting is used to print double-sided copies on paper that cannot be fed through the automatic duplex unit. The paper to be used for printing the second side can be loaded into the bypass tray.
2-93
2
2
Touch the button for the bypass tray.
Copy Operations
A paper tray set to "Duplex 2nd Side" is not selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected.
3 4
Touch [Change Tray Settings]. Select the type of paper to be loaded.
Touch [Duplex 2nd Side].
2-94
Copy Operations
2.25
Original documents
When making copies, load the document into the ADF or position it on the original glass. To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass. Documents that can be loaded into the ADF There are three methods for using the automatic document feeder. Normal method For documents of mixed sizes For Z-folded documents There are limits on the types of documents that can be loaded with each method. Normal method
Single-sided documents Document paper type/Weight Document size Paper capacity Plain paper: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 Double-sided documents Plain paper: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
A3 w to B6 w, A6 w,11 e 17 w, 8 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
For documents of mixed sizes

Single-sided documents Document paper type/Weight Document size Paper capacity Plain paper: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 Double-sided documents
Refer to "Mixed originals paper sizes". 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Mixed originals paper sizes The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used with the "Mixed Original" setting.
Maximum Document Width*1 Document Size*2 A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w o o o o o e e e o o o o o e e e e e o o o o o e e e o o o o o e e e e e o o o e e e e e o o o e e e e e e e o o e e e e e e e o A3 w A4 v B4 w B5 v A4 w A5 v B5 w A5 w

*1 Indicates the width of the widest document size of the mixed originals (width of the adjustable lateral guides
of the automatic document feeder).

*2
Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the maximum document width.
2-95
2
Precautions for loading documents into the ADF
Copy Operations
The following types of documents should not be loaded into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur. Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper Documents printed on paper thicker than 210 g/m2 Documents printed on paper thicker than 128 g/m2 during double-sided printing Documents that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips Documents that are bound in a book or booklet Documents with pages bound together with glue Documents with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts Label sheets Offset printing masters Documents with binder holes Documents that have just been printed with this machine
2
Reminder
Before loading folded documents, such as those folded in half or in a zigzag, into the ADF, be sure to flatten the pages.
Documents that can be placed on the original glass To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass.
Original glass documents Document types Document sizes Maximum weight Sheets, books (page spreads), three-dimensional objects A3 w to B6 w, A6 w 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8K w, 16K v/w 2 kg
Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the original glass. If a document of non-standard paper size is loaded, the "Auto" Paper setting and "Auto" Zoom setting cannot be used since the document size cannot be detected automatically. If a document of a non-standard paper size is loaded, select the paper drawer and zoom ratio or touch [Original Setting] and select the document size. If highly translucent or transparent documents, such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper, are loaded, the document size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same size over the document. Do not place objects exceeding 2 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
2-96
Copy Operations
2.26
Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function)

In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying, paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies
No Finishing setting can be used. Position the document to be copied. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. For details on loading OHP transparencies, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 2-80 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-22.
2 3
In the Basic screen, touch [Color], and then touch [Black]. Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black.
Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray, and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray. Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies.
Select [Transparency] as the paper type for the bypass tray, and then touch [OK]. For details on specifying the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a setting for special paper" on page 2-92.
2-97
2
5
Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
Copy Operations
To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
Touch [OHP Interleave].
The OHP Interleave screen appears.
Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [No].
Touch [OK].
2-98
Copy Operations
2
Specify any other desired copy settings. The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed.
9 10
2-99
2
2.27 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)
Copy Operations
Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the document (excluding the cover pages), and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy.
2
Note
If the optional post inserter has been installed, blank front or back covers can be added from the post inserter.
The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available.
Setting Front Cover Front (Copy) Description The first page of the document is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet. With double-sided copying, the second page of the document is copied onto the back of the front cover sheet. Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying. The last page of the document is copied onto the back cover page. With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the document is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the document contains an even number of pages. Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy. The same operation is performed with double-sided copying.
Front (Blank) Back Cover Back (Copy)
Back (Blank)
2-100
Copy Operations
2
Position the document to be copied. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 2-28.
Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the document into separate paper trays. Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the document, and load them in the same orientation.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 2-80 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-22. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
Touch [Cover Sheet].
The Cover Sheet screen appears.
2-101
2
5
Select the desired cover page settings.
Copy Operations
To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. To cancel the "Cover Sheet" function, touch [No]. The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility mode.
6 7
If desired, touch [Paper] under "Front Cover" or "Back Cover". The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears. Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages.
If "Front (Blank)" or "Back (Blank)" was selected in step 5, the optional post inserter can be selected as the paper tray.
8 9 10 11
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screen that appears. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-102
Copy Operations
2.28
Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)

Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies. There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings are combined with single-sided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown below. If "Copy" is selected, the document is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages. When page 2 is specified
Finishing Single-sided copies Double-sided copies Description The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and the 2nd sheet of the document is copied onto it. The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the document are printed onto it.
Copy
If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted before the specified page. When page 3 is specified
Finishing Single-sided copies Double-sided copies Description The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy. The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted for the 3rd sheet of the copy.
Blank
2-103
Copy Operations
!
Detail
The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back).
2
Note
If the optional post inserter has been installed, paper can be inserted from the post inserter.
Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the document into the desired paper trays. Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the document, and load them in the same orientation. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper types and paper capacities" on page 2-80 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-22. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
2-104
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Insert Sheet]. To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [No].
The Insert Sheet screen appears.
Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where the paper is to be inserted. There are two Insert Sheet screens. Touch and to display a different screen. To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, paper is not inserted.
Under "Insert Type", touch either [Copy] or [Blank]. If "Copy" is selected, the document is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page. If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page.
Touch [Insert Paper]. The Insert Paper Settings screen appears.
2-105
2
8
Copy Operations Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK].
If "Blank" was selected in step 6, the post inserter can be selected as the paper tray.
9 10 11 12
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-106
Copy Operations
2.29
Inserting copies of a different document for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)
A multi-page document later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in a document first scanned with the ADF. The inserted document is added after the specified pages.
!
Detail
A separate document can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back).
Load the document into the ADF. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 2-28.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
2-107
2
3
Touch [Insert Image]. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [No].
Copy Operations
The Insert Image screen appears.
Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted.
There are two Insert Image screens. Touch and to display a different screen. The inserted document is added after the specified page. To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. If the document scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the extra pages of the insertion document are printed at the end of the document. If the document scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages are not printed. If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion document pages are added at the specified location. If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main document, the corresponding insertion document page is added at the end of the document copy.
5 6 7
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
2-108
Copy Operations
2
Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins.
9 10 11
Place the document to be inserted on the original glass. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
Press the [Start] key. Scanning begins. Touch [Finish].
To insert a multi-page document, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion document are scanned in the order that they are to be inserted.
12
2-109
2
2.30
Copy Operations
Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)

When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper.
!
Detail
A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within a document of up to 999 pages. In double-sided documents, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and one for the back).
2
Note
Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size and orientation.
2-110
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Chapters].
The Chapter screen (for editing) appears.
Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters.
There are two Chapter screens. Touch and to display a different screen. To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort]. To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed, and then press the [C] (clear) key. Under "Original > Copy", select "1-Sided > 2-Sided". If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page numbers. If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the document, that page number is ignored.
Under "Chapter Paper", touch [Copy Insert] or [None]. If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [No].
2-111
Copy Operations If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK].
6 7 8 9
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-112
Copy Operations
2.31
Scanning documents with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)
Loaded document pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together. Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the document or Finishing settings or a numbering function can be set after the entire document is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together.
Original 1
Original 2
Original 3
2
Note
100 document batches can be set.

The "Group" Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs. Instead, select "Sort".
Position the document to be copied. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. When saving scanned data in a user box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 10,000 pages are saved in the box.
2-113
2
3
Touch [Program Jobs], and then touch [OK].
Copy Operations
Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key. To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. Scanning begins.
Touch [Fix], and then touch [OK].
If the document was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished. If "Retry" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings.
Position the next document, and then touch [Change Setting].
2-114
Copy Operations
2
Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all documents have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition, the number of document batches can be checked beside "Scanned Batches". When the memory is full, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the document data. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel]. Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, touch [Fix], and then touch [OK]. Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section.
?
8
After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish]. A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished.
Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK]. If "No" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings.
2-115
2
10
Specify any other desired copy settings.
Copy Operations
Touch [Print List], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned document.
?
11 12
Is there more information about the settings? % Refer to the appropriate section.
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Touch [Start] or press the [Start] key. If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop printing, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
2-116
Copy Operations
2.32
Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function)
An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper. The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding front and back covers.
Setting Book Spread Separation Front Cover Front and Back Cover Description Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page. Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the document page order. The document is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used. The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the document page order. The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover are printed in the document page order.
Place the document on the original glass. Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the front cover is scanned before the back cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order.
?
2
How are the front and back covers copied? % Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the document.
Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray.
2-117
2
3
Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat].
Copy Operations
To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears.
Touch [Book Copy].
[Booklet Original] appears only if the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed. The Book Copy screen appears.
Touch the button for the desired setting.
If "Separation", "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, [Binding Position] appears. Select the binding position of the document. If desired, specify a Book Erase function. Touch the button for the erasing method, touch [-] and [+] to specify the width of the area to be erased, and then touch "OK". When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then type in the setting.
2-118
Copy Operations To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [No].
Center Erase screen
? ? %
6 7
What do the Book Erase functions do? % The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies. The "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together. What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? The message "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value.
Touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper.
8 9 10
Specify any other desired copy settings. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 2-31. Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the document are scanned. Scanning begins. If "Book Spread" or "Separation" is selected, printing begins. If "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, continue with step 11.
2-119
2
11
Copy Operations
If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then all page spreads are scanned in order.
If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover.
12
2-120
Copy Operations
2.33
Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)

A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document, the specified paper size and the zoom ratio. The following repeating formats and settings are available.
Setting With Margin Without Margin 2/4/8 Repeat Description Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around the image appears as a margin. Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however, a part of the image may be cut off. A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper. The number of repeating copies can be set to 2, 4 or 8 times. However, any part of the image that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off. After specifying settings in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, the paper and zoom ratio settings must be specified.
Document With Margin
Without Margin
1 2 3
Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray. Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
2-121
2
4
Touch [Image Repeat].
Copy Operations
[Booklet Original] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-608 is not installed. The Image Repeat screen appears.
Under "Layout", touch [With Margin] or [Without Margin], or touch [2/4/8 Repeat]. To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [No].
Touching [2/4/8 Repeat] displays the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, where the number of repeats and the interval can be selected.
2-122
Copy Operations
2
Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears. If the document size does not appear under "Scan Range" or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set Range], and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens. Touch [Photo Size] to display the Photo Size screen. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Set Range screen
Custom Size screen
Photo Size screen
? % ? ?
Can sizes in inches be displayed? Touch or to display a different list of sizes.
Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value.
2-123
2
7
Copy Operations In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper.
If settings were specified in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, touch [Zoom] in the Basic screen, and then specify the zoom ratio setting.
8 9 10
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-124
Copy Operations
2.34
Copying an enlarged image on multiple pages ("Poster Mode" function)

A document image can be divided, and each section of the image can be printed enlarged. The finished size can be specified by the image size, zoom ratio or paper size.
1 2
Place the document on the original glass. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
Touch [Poster Mode].
[Booklet Original] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-608 is not installed. The Poster Mode screen appears.
2-125
2
4
Under "Output Size", touch [Image Size], [Paper Size] or [Zoom]. The factory default setting for the finished size is "A2".
Copy Operations
Touch [Image Size], select the finished image size, and then touch [OK]. Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes. Touching [Custom Size] displays the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value.
Touch [Paper Size], select the finished paper size, and then touch [OK]. Touch or to display a different list of paper sizes.
2-126
Copy Operations Touch [Zoom], use the keypad to type in the desired value, and then touch [OK].
Check the document size, and then touch [OK]. If the document size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the document size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. Touch [Photo Size] to display the Photo Size screen. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Original Size screen
Custom Size screen
2-127
2
Photo Size screen
Copy Operations
? ? % ? %
6 7
Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch or to display a different list of sizes. Can any size be specified? Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? The message "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value.
Specify any other desired copy settings. The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed.
2-128
Copy Operations
2.35
Copying booklets ("Booklet Original" function)

A booklet with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of the original booklet.
Staples
!
Detail
For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 2-63. With the "Booklet Original" function, copies are made of the entire page, including the center of the document (area bound with staples). For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
0 This function can be used when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed. Position the document to be copied. Load a booklet with the staples removed. The number of sheets that can be stapled together is no more than 20 and differs depending on the paper type. For details, refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 2-60. When using the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page.
2-129
Copy Operations When using the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
Touch [Booklet Original].
4 5 6 7
Touch [Close]. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key. If the document is placed on the original glass, scanning begins. For details on scanning a document from the original glass, refer to "Scanning a multi-page document from the original glass" on page 2-31.
After all document pages have been scanned, touch [Finish] and then press the [Start] key.
2-130
Copy Operations
2.36
Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)

When the copy paper is larger than the original document, copies can be made with the document image centered and enlarged to fill the paper. The image can be adjusted in any of the following ways.
Setting Full Size Center Zoom Centering Description The area that contains the entire image is centered and enlarged to the size of the paper. The image is enlarged to the size of the paper so that the paper is filled. However, some parts of the image may be lost. The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged.
Full Size
Center Zoom
Centering
Position the document to be copied. For details on positioning the document, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26. If "Full Size" or "Center Zoom" is to be set, position the document on the original glass.
Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjust]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
The Image Adjust screen appears.
2-131
2
3
Touch the button for the desired setting.
Copy Operations
To cancel the Image Adjust settings, touch [No]. If a non-standard-sized document is loaded, the document size is not detected. Therefore, specify the document size in the Custom Size screen, and then press the [Start] key.
Check the document size, and then touch [OK]. If the document size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the document size, touch [Original Size], and then specify the document size from any of the screens. To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Original Size screen
Custom Size screen
2-132
Copy Operations Touch [Photo Size] to display the Photo Size screen.
Photo Size screen
? ? ?
5 6 7
Can sizes in inches be displayed? % Touch or to display a different list of sizes. Can any size be specified? % Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y] to select the dimension, and then use the keypad to specify the correct value. (To enter a value, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.) What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified? % The message "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value.
Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-133
2
2.37
Copy Operations
Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)

The page order of the scanned document is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. Stapling is possible only when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed.
"Left Bind" setting
"Right Bind" setting
!
Detail
Generally, a multiple of 4 document pages is required with a single-sided document, and a multiple of 2 document pages is required with a double-sided document. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end. For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on page 2-63. For a document that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the document in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 2-28. The width of the binding margin is automatically specified.
1 2
Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet]. To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
2-134
Copy Operations
2
Touch [Left Bind] or [Right Bind]. If the document contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top, regardless of which setting is selected. To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key. To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [No].
4 5 6 7
Touch [OK]. Specify any other desired copy settings. Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. Press the [Start] key.
2-135
2
2.38 Printing the date/time or page number on copies ("Stamp/Composition" functions)
Copy Operations
The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can be added when multiple copies are made. The following Stamp/Composition functions are available and can be combined.
Function Date/Time Page Number Stamp Description Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages. Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number. Copy Protect Stamp Repeat Overlay Header/Footer Preset Stamp Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages. Registered Stamp Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility overlapping pages.
Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying), such as a preset stamp or the date. Print copies with text (such as registered stamps, preset stamps or the date) repeating throughout the page. Copies can be printed with the contents of the first document page overlapped by (as an overlay image) the remaining document pages. The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page. This function is available only when specified by the administrator.
2-136
Copy Operations
2.39
Saving the scanned document in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)
A scanned document can be saved in a user box. Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when necessary.
1 2
Position the document to be copied. Touch [Application], and then touch [Save in User Box].
Touch [User Box].
A screen for selecting a user box appears.
Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch the tab containing the desired user box, and then button for the user box. To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the box.
2-137
Copy Operations Touching [Search User Box] displays the Search User Box screen. User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name. Touch [etc] or the button that includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected letter. A user box can be selected from this screen.
5 6
Touch [OK]. Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes] beside "Save & Print".
7 8
Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. The name specified as the default appears beside "Document Name". For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
2-138
Copy Operations
2
After typing in the name, touch [OK]. To cancel the "Save in User Box" function, touch [No].
10 11 12
Touch [OK]. The Application screen appears again. Specify any other desired copy settings. Press the [Start] key. If [Yes] beside "Page Print" was selected, the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. If [No] beside "Page Print" was selected, the data for the scanned document is saved in the specified user box.
2-139
2
2.40 Overview of utility mode parameters
List of registration information and parameters This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed.
Copy Operations
2
Note
The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings.
List of Utility mode parameters
First-level menu [1] One-Touch/User Box Registration Second-level menu [1] Create One-Touch Destination Third-level menu [1] Address Book [2] Group [3] E-mail Settings [2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal User Box [2] Bulletin Board User Box [3] Relay User Box [3] Limiting Access to Destinations [2] User Settings [1] System Settings [1] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations [1] Language Selection [2] Measurement Unit Settings [3] Paper Tray Settings [4] Auto Color Level Adjust. [5] Power Save Settings [6] Output Settings [7] AE Level Adjustment [8] Auto Paper Select for Small Original [9] Blank Page Print Settings [2] Custom Display Settings [1] Copier Settings [2] Scan/Fax Settings [3] Copy Screen [4] Fax Active Screen [5] Color Selection Settings [6] Left Panel Display Default [7] Search Option Settings
2-140
Copy Operations
2
Second-level menu [3] Copier Settings Third-level menu Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom For Combine/ Booklet Auto Sort/Group Selection Default Copy Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings When AMS Direction is Incorrect Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tri-Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation [4] Scan/Fax Settings JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Default Scan/Fax Settings Default Enlarge Display Settings Compact PDF Compression Level [5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings [2] Paper Setting [3] PCL Settings [4] PS Setting [5] XPS Settings [6] Print Reports [6] Change Password [7] Change E-Mail Address E-Mail Address
First-level menu [2] User Settings
2-141
2
First-level menu [3] Administrator Settings Second-level menu [1] System Settings Third-level menu
Copy Operations
[1] Power Save Settings [2] Output Settings [3] Date&Time Settings [4] Daylight Saving Time [5] Weekly Timer Settings [6] Restrict User Access [7] Expert Adjustment [8] List/Counter [9] Reset Settings [0] User Box Settings (next screen) [2] Stamp Settings [3] Blank Page Print Settings
[2] Administrator/Machine Settings
[1] Administrator Registration [2] Input Machine Address
[3] One-Touch/User Box Registration
[1] Create One-Touch Destination [2] Create User Box [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration List [4] Maximum Number of User Boxes
[4] User Authentication/Account Track
[1] General Settings [2] Authentication System [3] Account Track Settings [4] Print without Authentication [5] Print Counter List [6] External Server Settings [7] Limiting Access to Destinations [8] Authentication Device Setting
2-142
Copy Operations
2
Second-level menu [5] Network setting Third-level menu [1] TCP/IP Setting [2] NetWare Settings [3] HTTP Server Settings [4] FTP Setting [5] SMB Setting [6] LDAP Settings [7] E-Mail Settings [8] SNMP Settings [9] AppleTalk Settings [0] Bonjour Settings (next screen) [1] TCP Socket Settings [2] Network Fax Settings [3] WebDAV Client Settings [4] Web Service Settings [5] Detail Settings [6] Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS Off Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri-Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation [7] Printer Settings USB Timeout Network Timeout Print XPS Errors [8] Fax Settings [1] Header Information [2] Header/Footer Position [3] Line Parameter Setting [4] TX/RX Settings [5] Function Settings [6] PBX Connection Settings [7] Report Settings [8] Job Settings List [9] Multi Line Setting [0] Network Fax Setting [9] System Connection [0] Security Settings [1] Open API Settings [1] Administrator Password [2] User Box Administrator Setting [3] Administrator Security Levels [4] Security Details [5] Enhanced Security Mode [6] HDD Settings [7] Function Management Settings [8] Stamp Settings [0] Driver Password Encryption Settings
First-level menu [3] Administrator Settings
2-143
2
First-level menu [4] Check Consumable Life [6] Banner Printing (bizhub C451) Second-level menu Print List Allow Restrict Third-level menu
Copy Operations
2-144
Print Operations
Print Operations
3
3.1
Print Operations
Setting up the PCL driver for Windows
Common settings The following describes the common settings and buttons that are displayed on all tabs.
Button OK Cancel Help Add (Favorite Setting) Edit (Favorite Setting) Default Printer Information View
Function Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings that have been changed. Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed and close the dialog box. Click this button to display the help for each item on the currently displayed dialog box. Click this button to save the current settings and to view them at a later time. Click this button to change the saved settings. Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which were selected when the driver was installed. Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection and check the information of the machine. This is enabled when communication with the machine is possible. When the [Paper View] button is clicked, a preview of the page layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked. When the [Printer View] button is clicked, a printer figure is displayed showing any options, such as the paper tray, that are installed on this machine.
Paper
Printer
2
Note
To enable any installed options, you must specify the Device Option settings.
3-3
3
Basic tab
Item Original Orientation Original Size Paper Size Zoom Paper Tray Paper Type Output Method [User Settings] [Authentication/Account Track] Function Specifies the orientation of the original document. Specifies the size of the original document.
Print Operations
Specifies the output paper size. Automatically enlarges or reduces when the Original Size setting is changed. Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio. Selects the paper tray for printing. Selects the paper type for printing. For non-conventional printing, selects special output methods such as "Secure Print" or "Save in User Box". Specifies the ID and password, or the file name and box number when performing "Secure Print" or "Save in User Box". Specifies the user name and password when performing user authentication, and the department name and password when performing account track on this machine. Specifies the number of copies to print. Specifies whether to print multiple copies in sets. When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set. Specifies the paper type for each paper tray.
Copies Collate Offset Paper Settings for Each Tray
Layout tab
Item Combination Function Prints multiple pages on one page, or prints one sheet of an original document divided on multiple pages. Details can be specified by clicking the [Combination Details] button. Prints the image rotated 180. Does not print blank pages in the data. Specifies the page to be printed on the front side. Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing. Specifies the binding position. Specifies the binding margin. Click the [Binding Margin Settings] button to specify the margin values. Prints by shifting the entire print image. Click the [Image Shift Settings] button to specify the image shift values.
Rotate 180 Skip Blank Pages Chapter Print Type Binding Direction Binding Margin Image Shift
Finish tab
Item Staple Saddle Stitch Punch Fold Output Tray Paper Arrangement Function Specifies stapling. Specifies to saddle stitch a printed document. Specifies hole punching. Specifies folding. Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages. Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position.
3-4
Print Operations Cover mode tab

Item Front Cover Front Cover Tray Back Cover Back Cover Tray Front Cover from Post Inserter Back Cover from Post Inserter Per Page Setting Transparency Interleave Interleave Tray Function Attaches a front cover page. Selects the paper tray for the front cover. Attaches a back cover page. Selects the paper tray for the back cover. Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Inserts paper between pages and switches the paper and tray for each page.
Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies. Selects the input tray for the transparency interleaves.
Stamp/Composition tab
Item Watermark Create Overlay File Copy Protect Date/Time Page Number Header/Footer Function Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the page being printed. Watermarks can be added, changed, or deleted by clicking the [Edit] button. Prints an original document on top of an overlay that was created separately. Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. Prints the date and time. Prints the page number. Prints a header and a footer.
Quality tab
Item Select Color Quality Adjustment Color Settings Pattern Image Compression Glossy Mode Font Settings Download Font Format Use Printer Fonts Function Specifies the color for printing. Adjusts the image quality. You can select "Simple" to adjust entire documents or "Detail" to adjust the text, photos, figures, tables, and graphs in the document. Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original document. Specifies the graphic pattern details. Specifies the compression ratio for a graphic image. Prints with a gloss. Selects whether the fonts are downloaded to the printer as bitmap or outline. Selects whether to use TrueType fonts or the printer fonts when printing.
Other tab
Item Excel Job Control Remove White Back-ground Function Controls jobs so that they are not separated when printing in Microsoft Excel. Removes the white background when creating an overlay file with Microsoft PowerPoint. If this check box is cleared, the background is not removed and the overlay file is created according to the orig-inal document data. When printing the document reduced, thin line may be blurred. Select this function to prevent disappearing the thin line. Displays the version information of the printer driver.
Thin Line Support Driver Version Info
3-5
3
Configure tab
Item Device Option Function
Print Operations
Specifies the status of the options that are installed on this machine and the status of the user authentication and account track functions. Specify the status of each item from the "Setting" drop-down list. Shows the paper type specified for each tray. Click the [Paper Tray Settings] button to specify the settings for each paper tray. Communicates with this machine to read the status of the installed options. Specifies the status of the connection that executes getting the option information. Enters the encryption passphrase when it is user defined by communicating with this machine. Starts up software tools such as PageScope Web Connection.
Paper Tray Information Acquire Device Information Acquire Settings Encrypt. Passphrase Software Tools
2
Note
To display the Configure tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". You cannot use the "Acquire Device Information" function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine.
Settings tab
Item EMF Spool Display Constraint Message Display paper set in Print Server Properties. Verify Authentication settings before printing Popup Authentication Dialog when printing Save Custom Size Function When using an original system environment, select this check box if a metafile (EMF) spool is required. Displays a message when functions that cannot be specified at the same time were enabled from the printer driver. Uses the paper that was added in [Server Properties] of the printer folder. Verifies the authentication settings for this machine before printing and displays a message if the settings are not compatible. Displays the User Authentication/Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified to enter the user name and department name. Saves the custom paper sizes.
2
Note
To display the Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
3-6
Print Operations
3.2
Specifying the basic tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Printing to suit the paper size You can enlarge or reduce documents created when printing to match the output paper size.
1 2
Click the Basic tab. From the "Original Size" and "Paper Size" drop-down lists, select the desired settings. You can also specify any enlargement or reduction ratio in the "Zoom" box.
2
Note
"12 e 18" paper size is one size larger than A3 paper size at 504.8 e 457.2 mm. To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, be sure to set the custom paper sizes in Custom Size Settings first. When "W" is selected for each standard paper size from the printer driver, the data can be centered and printed. For example, if A4 size data is created and you want to center and print on A3 size paper, select "A4W" as the paper size and "Tray 1" or "Bypass Tray" as the paper tray from the printer driver. To print, load A3 size paper in the tray ("Tray 1" or "Bypass Tray") of this machine that was specified from the printer driver, and then specify the settings described below from [Basic (Paper)] [Change Tray Settings] [Wide Paper] in the control panel. Select "A4W". Enter the A3 paper size (420.0 e 297.0) in [Change Size].
3-7
3
Specifying a custom size
Print Operations
When printing on paper of a custom size, you can select a preregistered custom paper size or specify a paper size value as described below.
1 2
From the "Original Size" or the "Paper Size" drop-down list, select "Custom Size". The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears. Specify settings for the following: Width: Specifies the width of the custom paper size according to the selected measurement unit. Length: Specifies the length of the custom paper size according to the selected measurement unit. Unit: Selects the measurement unit that specifies the size.
Click the [OK] button.
2
Note
For custom sizes that are used often, it comes in handy if you add them to the paper size list. Add a custom paper size from the Settings tab. bizhub C451: If using banner paper, specify the size of the banner paper in Custom Size.
Selecting the paper tray You can specify the paper you want to use for printing by selecting the paper tray that contains the loaded paper.
1 2
Click the Basic tab. From the "Paper Tray" drop-down list, select the desired paper tray.
2
Note
If "Auto" is specified as the paper tray, you can select the paper type. If the paper tray setting is changed to a setting other than "Auto", the paper type is fixed to its preregistered setting. Specify a paper type by clicking the [Paper Settings for Each Tray] button. For details, refer to "Specifying the paper type for a paper tray" on page 3-9.
3-8
Print Operations Specifying the paper type for a paper tray You can specify the paper type for a paper tray.
1 2 3
Click the Basic tab. Click the [Paper Settings for Each Tray] button. The Paper Settings for Each Tray dialog box appears. From "Paper Type Settings", select the desired paper tray, and then select the paper type to be specified from the "Paper Type" drop-down list.
2
Note
The current specified settings can be checked in "Device Status". Click the [Restore Device Status] button to communicate with this machine and read the status of the settings specified on this machine. You cannot use this function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine. The paper type for a paper tray can also be specified from the Configure tab, and the paper size and paper orientation can be specified as well. Specify "Duplex Side 2" to print on the back side of a page.
3-9
3
Selecting the output method
Print Operations
Not only can you print directly, but you can select "Secure Print", which requires a password to print, or "Save in User Box", which saves data in the boxes that were created on the HDD.
1 2
Click the Basic tab. From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select the output method. Print: Prints immediately. Secure Print: Saves the document to be printed in "Secure Print User Box" of this machine. When printing, you are required to enter the ID and password in this machines control panel. Select when printing highly confidential documents. Save in User Box: Saves the document to be printed in a box on this machine. Save in User Box and Print: Saves the document in a box and prints at the same time. Proof Print: After a part of the document has been printed, this machine stops printing temporarily. Select to avoid misprinting a large volume of print jobs.
Secure Print
If "Secure Print" was selected, enter the ID and password in the dialog box that appeared.
2
Note
The ID and password that are required for "Secure Print" can be preregistered by clicking the [User Settings] button under "Output Method". If the ID and password are already registered, the dialog box to enter the ID and password does not appear when "Secure Print" is selected. To print, specify "Secure Print Document Box" from the Box mode in this machines control panel, and then enter the ID and password. When password rules are enabled on this machine, the passwords that can be used for secured printing are limited and the jobs are deleted when a password that does not comply with the password rule is entered.
3-10
Print Operations
Save in User Box

When "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box and Print" is selected, specify the file name to be saved and the box number for the save location in the dialog box that appears for entering the file name and box number.
2
Note
The file name and box number that are required for "Save in User Box" can be preregistered by clicking the [User Settings] button under "Output Method". If the file name and box number are already registered, the dialog box to enter the file name and box number does not appear when "Save in User Box" is selected. Be sure to create the box of the save location in advance with the box function of this machine. When password rules are enabled on this machine, specify the box that was created on this machine. Proof Print
When a print job is sent, this machine stops printing temporarily after part of the document has been printed. The remaining print job is stored in this machine as a print job. When printing multiple copies, you can print the remaining part of the print job after checking the print results.
2
Note
To print the document, release the held document from the Job mode in this machines control panel.
3-11
3
Specifying the user authentication settings
Print Operations
If the user authentication settings have been specified on this machine, you must enter a user name and password.
2
Note
If a job is printed using a user name or password that is not a registered account on this machine, or if a job is printed without selecting a user under "User Authentication", the operation is not authenticated by this machine and the job is canceled. If the user authentication settings are specified on this machine and the authentication operation restriction function is in mode 2, the applicable user is locked and cannot be accessed if the authentication information is not entered correctly. If the user authentication settings are not specified on the Configure tab, user authentication cannot be performed. If using the user authentication function, be sure to specify the settings on the Configure tab.
1 2 3
Click the Basic tab. Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
2
Note
If this machine has been set to permit public users, the machine can be used without a user name and password. If performing user authentication on a server, the server settings must be specified. Click the [Server Setting] button to select the server. Click the [Verify] button to communicate with this machine and to check whether authentication can be performed with the user that was entered. You cannot use this function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine. If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even when used by a registered user. For details on the user authentication function, consult the administrator of this machine. If performing user authentication with an optional authentication unit, enter the user name and password in step 3. For details, refer to the operation manual of the authentication unit.
3-12
Print Operations Specifying the account track settings
If the account track settings have been specified on this machine, you must enter a department name and password.
2
Note
If a job is printed using a department name or password that is not a registered account on this machine, or if a job is printed without "Account Track" selected, the operation is not authenticated by this machine and the job is canceled. When the account track settings are specified on this machine, the authentication operation restriction function is in mode 2, and the authentication information is not entered correctly, the applicable account is locked and cannot be accessed. If the account track settings are not specified on the Configure tab, account track cannot be performed. If using the account track function, be sure to specify the settings on the Configure tab.
1 2 3
Click the Basic tab. Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button. Enter the department name and password.
2
Note
Click the [Verify] button to communicate with this machine and to check whether authentication can be performed with the user that was entered. You cannot use this function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine. If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even when used by a registered account. For details on the account track function, consult the administrator of this machine.
3-13
3
3.3 Specifying the layout tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Print Operations
Printing multiple pages on one page (N in 1, Poster mode) You can specify whether to print multiple pages of text on one page with N in 1 printing, or print one sheet of an original document divided on multiple pages with Poster Mode printing.
1 2
Click the Layout tab. Select the "Combination" check box, and then specify the setting from the drop-down list. To change the "Border" and "Overlap width line" settings, click the [Combination Details] button, and then change the settings in the dialog box that appears.
2
Reminder
When printing a job that contains pages of different sizes and orientations, images may be missing or overlapping when the document is printed.
3-14
Print Operations Chapter You can specify the page you want to print on the front side when duplex printing or booklet printing.
Even if a specified page comes up to be printed on the back side in duplex printing or booklet printing, the specified page is moved and printed on the front side.
1 2 3
Click the Layout tab. Select the "Chapter" check box. Enter the page number of the page you want to print on the front side.
2
Note
When entering multiple page numbers, separate the page numbers with commas such as "2, 4, 6" or enter a page range using a hyphen such as "6-10". The "Chapter" check box can only be selected when the duplex printing or the booklet printing setting is enabled.
Specifying duplex/booklet printing You can print a document onto both sides of a page or in a booklet format (two facing pages). This comes in handy when you want to bind multiple-page documents.
1 2
Click the Layout tab. From the "Print Type" drop-down list, select "2-Sided" or "Booklet".
2
Note
The binding position can be specified from the "Binding Direction" drop-down list.
3-15
3
Setting the binding margin Binding margins are added to the document before it is printed.
Print Operations
1 2 3 4
Click the Layout tab. From the "Binding Direction" drop-down list, select the binding position. Select the "Binding Margin" check box. To set the width of the binding margin, click the [Binding Margin Settings] button, and then specify the desired settings in the Binding Margin Settings dialog box that appears. Shift Mode: To add a binding margin, select how the image is to be shifted. Front Side/Back Side: Sets the binding margin values. By clearing the "Same value for front and back sides" check box, you can specify separate values for the front and back sides. Unit: Selects the measurement unit that specifies the size.
3-16
Print Operations Shifting images
The entire print image of a document is shifted and then printed. You can use this function when you want to adjust the print position.
1 2 3
Click the Layout tab. Select the "Image Shift" check box. To set the image shift settings, click the [Image Shift Settings] button, and then specify the desired settings in the Image Shift Settings dialog box that appears. Unit: Selects the measurement unit that specifies the size. Front Side/Back Side: Specifies the shift direction and sets the values. By clearing the "Same value for Front and Back sides" check box, you can set separate values for the front and back sides.
3-17
3
3.4 Specifying the finish tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Print Operations
Stapling Multiple-page documents can be stapled.
2
Reminder
The staple function is available only when the optional finisher is installed.
1 2 3
Click the Finish tab. Select the "Staple" check box. From the drop-down list, specify the number of staples and the stapling position.
2
Note
Specify the staple position noting the binding position specified in "Binding Direction".
Specifying the saddle stitch setting You can specify to saddle stitch a printed document. By specifying the saddle stitch setting, printed documents can be folded in half and stapled.
2
Reminder
The saddle stitch function is available only when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed.
1 2
Click the Finish tab. Select the "Saddle Stitch" check box.
2
Note
The saddle stitch function cannot be specified when the staple, punch, or fold function is specified. The saddle stitch function and the thick paper function cannot be specified when finisher FS-608 is installed.
3-18
Print Operations Hole punching Holes can be punched into the printed document.
2
Reminder
The hole punch function is available only when the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
1 2 3
Click the Finish tab. Select the "Punch" check box. From the drop-down list, specify the number of punched holes.
2
Note
The hole-punch position changes according to the binding position specified from "Binding Direction".
Folding You can specify to fold a printed document.
2
Reminder
The fold function is available only when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed.
1 2 3
Click the Finish tab. Select the "Fold" check box. From the drop-down list, specify the folding condition.
2
Note
The fold function cannot be specified when the staple, punch, or saddle stitch function is specified.
Specifying the output tray You can specify the tray to which the printed document is output.
1 2
Click the Finish tab. From the "Output Tray" drop-down list, specify the output tray.
Specifying the procedure for adjusting the binding position You can specify the procedure for adjusting the binding position for duplex printing. If "Prioritize Arranging Papers" is selected, all pages can be processed to a suitable quality by this machine because the binding position is adjusted after all the print data is received. If "Prioritize Productivity" is selected, the printing process is performed efficiently because the binding position is adjusted while the data is printed simultaneously as it is being received. If you want to increase the print efficiency, select "Prioritize Productivity". If the desired binding position and width cannot be achieved, select "Prioritize Arranging Papers".
1 2
Click the Finish tab. From the "Paper Arrangement" drop-down list, specify the processing method.
3-19
3
3.5
Print Operations
Specifying the cover mode tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Printing documents with a front cover/back cover
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
Click the Cover Mode tab. Select the "Front Cover" and "Back Cover" check boxes. From the "Front Cover" and "Back Cover" drop-down lists, select the desired print settings. To print on the front cover and back cover, select "Print". To only add a blank page, select "Blank". Select the paper tray that contains the loaded paper for the front cover and back cover.
Printing documents with a front cover/back cover from a post inserter Click the Cover Mode tab. Select the "Front Cover from Post Inserter" and the "Back Cover from Post Inserter" check boxes. Select the PI tray that contains the loaded paper for the Front Cover from Post Inserter function and the Back Cover from Post Inserter function.
2
Note
The Front Cover from Post Inserter function and the Back Cover from Post Inserter function are available only when an optional post inserter is installed. The Front Cover from Post Inserter function and the Back Cover from Post Inserter function cannot be specified when the Front Cover function and the Back Cover function are specified.
3-20
Print Operations Printing multiple pages
You can specify the print type and paper tray for each page. This comes in handy when you want to change the paper tray during a print job when printing multiple pages.
1 2 3 4 5
Click the Cover Mode tab. Select the "Per Page Setting" check box. From the "Per Page Setting" drop-down list, select the desired list name. Click the [Edit List] button. The Per Page Settings Edit List dialog box for specifying the print settings appears. Click the [Add] button. A new row for specifying the print settings is added to "Settings List".
Select the row that was added to the list, and then specify the print settings in "Add/Edit". Page Number: Enters the page number. When entering multiple page numbers, separate the page numbers with commas such as "2, 4, 6" or enter a page range using a hyphen such as "6-10". Print Type: Specifies Print Insert, Insert Blank Sheet, Print (1-Sided), and Print (2-Sided). Paper Tray: Specifies the paper tray. Staple: Specifies the number of staples and the stapling position.
2
Note
To change existing print settings, select the desired row and change the settings. To delete existing print settings, select the desired row, and then click the [Delete] button. Click the [Up] or the [Down] button to change the page number starting with the smallest page number. The list name can be changed by clicking the [Edit List Name] button.
3-21
3
Printing with transparency interleaves
Print Operations
If "Transparency" is selected as the paper type, you can select the "Transparency Interleave" check box to enable the transparency interleave setting. By selecting the "Transparency Interleave" check box, overhead projector transparencies can be inserted between the printed pages.
1 2 3 4
Click the Cover Mode tab. Select the "Transparency Interleave" check box. From the "Transparency Interleave" drop-down list, specify the printing conditions. From the "Transparency Interleave" drop-down list, select the paper tray that contains the paper to be used.
3-22
Print Operations
3.6
Specifying the stamp/composition tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Printing a watermark You can print specific text in the background as a watermark.
1 2 3
Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Watermark" check box. From the list, select the watermark that you want to print.
!
Detail
For Windows Vista x64, the watermark function cannot be specified when the following functions are specified at the same time. User Authentication Account Track Per Page Setting Verify Authentication settings before printing Popup Authentication Dialog when printing
3-23
3
Editing a watermark You can change the fonts and position of the watermark and you can register a new one.
Print Operations
1 2 3 4 5
Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Watermark" check box. Click the [Edit] button under "Watermark". The Edit Watermark dialog box appears. To create a watermark, click the [Add] button. To change a watermark, select the watermark from the "Current Watermark" list. Specify settings for the following:
Watermark Name: Enters the name of the watermark. Watermark Text: Enters the text to be printed as a watermark. [Add]: Click to create a new watermark. [Delete]: Click to delete the selected watermark. Position: Specifies the vertical and horizontal positions. The watermark position can also be specified by using the horizontal and vertical sliders in the dialog box. Text Angle: Specifies the watermark print angle. Font Name: Specifies the font. Size: Specifies the size. Style: Specifies the font style. Frame: Specifies the frame style. Text Color: Specifies the watermark text color. Sharing: Specifies whether to register the watermark as public or private. Transparent: Prints the watermark as a transparent image. 1st Page Only: Prints the watermark on the first page only. Repeat: Prints several watermarks on a single page.
2
Note
Up to 30 watermarks can be registered with the shared setting, and up to 20 watermarks can be registered with the private setting. Only the administrator can select a setting under "Sharing".
3-24
Print Operations Printing different original documents together (overlay) An original document can be printed on top of the overlay data that was created separately. This function comes in handy when creating fax cover letters or form letters.
2
Note
You must create and preregister the overlay file to be printed. For details, refer to "Editing an overlay file" on page 3-27.
1 2 3 4 5
Create the print data using any application. From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select this machine in "Printer Name", and then click the [Properties] button or the [Preferences] button. Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Print in Overlay" check box.
6 7
From the list, select the overlay that you want to print. Click the [Edit] button under "Print in Overlay". The Edit Print In Overlay dialog box appears.
3-25
3
8
Specify the overlay printing method.
Print Operations
Pages to Print: Specifies the pages to print. Overwrite: Specifies the sequence for printing the overlay on top of the original document.
9 10 11
Click the [OK] button. The Stamp/Composition tab appears again. Click the [OK] button. The Print dialog box appears again. Click the [Print] button. The printing of the overlay is performed.
3-26
Print Operations Editing an overlay file
To use an overlay, an overlay file must be created and added to the overlay file list. You can create and save a new overlay file by selecting the "Create Overlay File" check box, specifying the document that you want to create as an overlay file, then clicking the [Print] button on the Print dialog box. To add an existing overlay file that was created to the list, specify the file. Creating an overlay file
1 2 3 4 5
Create the overlay file data using any application. From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select this machine in "Printer Name", and then click the [Properties] button or the [Preferences] button. Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Create Overlay File" check box.
6 7
Click the [OK] button. The Print dialog box appears again. Click the [Print] button. The dialog box to save the overlay file appears.
3-27
3
8
Print Operations Specify the storage location for the overlay file, enter the file name in the "File Name" box, and then enter the overlay name or a comment in the "Overlay Name" text box.
Click the [Save] button. Instead of executing a print, the overlay file is saved and is added to the list to be used for the next operation. The file extension is ".KFO".
Registering an overlay file
1 2 3
Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Click the [Edit] button under "Print in Overlay". The Edit Print In Overlay dialog box appears. Click the [Browse Files] button to open the overlay file. The overlay file is added to the "Select Overlay File" list.
3-28
Print Operations
3
Note
2
By clicking the [Delete] button in the Edit Print In Overlay dialog box, the selected overlay file can be deleted from the overlay file list. The file itself is not deleted.
Printing with copy protection You can print a special pattern on an entire page while printing. When copying a printed page, the characters embedded in the pattern appear to prevent an illegal copy.
1 2 3 4
Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Copy Protect" check box. Click the [Edit] button under "Copy Protect". The Edit Copy Protect dialog box appears. Specify the copy protection type and the position. Multiple print items can be specified.
Characters: Embeds the selected character string in a pattern. A preregistered character string (common stamp) or a character string registered on this machine (registered stamp) can be specified. Date/Time: Embeds the selected date and time in a pattern. By clicking the [Edit] button under "Format", you can specify the display type or the time format. Serial Number: Embeds the serial number of this machine in a pattern. Distribution Control Number: Embeds the number of copies in a pattern when printing multiple copies. By clicking the [Edit] button under "Start Number", you can specify the start number or the display type. Job Number: Embeds the print job number in a pattern for documents that are automatically paginated. Text Size: Specifies the text size of a pattern. Angle: Specifies the pattern angle.
3-29
3
5
Print Operations Select the composition method for copy protection. Select "Copy Protect" to specify the desired results when copying, or simply select "Stamp Repeat". In addition, you can select the embedding conditions.
Pattern: Specifies the embedding method of a pattern. Pattern Overwrite: Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original document. Background Pattern: Specifies the pattern background. Text/Background Color: Specifies the pattern color. The density and color contrast can be specified by clicking the [Adjust Color] button.
3-30
Print Operations Printing the date and page numbers You can print the date and page numbers on a document.
1 2 3 4
Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Date/Time" or the "Page Number" check box. The "Date/Time" and "Page Number" check boxes can be selected at the same time. Click the [Edit] button under "Page Number". The Edit Date/Time/Page Number dialog box appears. Specify the format and print position for the date, time, and page number.
Format: Displays the format for the date and time to be printed. By clicking the [Edit] button, you can specify the display type or the time format. Pages to Print: Specifies the pages to print the date and time. Text Color: Specifies the text color to print. Print Position: Specifies the print position. Starting Page: Specifies the page to start printing the page number. Starting Page Number: Specifies the start number for printing the page number. Cover Mode: If cover pages are attached, specifies whether to print the page number on the front cover page or the back cover page.
5 1 2 3 4 5
Printing a header and a footer Click the Stamp/Composition tab. Select the "Header/Footer" check box. From the drop-down list, select the Header/Footer setting. To specify the header and the footer details, continue with step 4.
Click the [Edit] button under "Header/Footer". The Edit Header/Footer dialog box appears. Specify the print settings and pages for the header and the footer. The number of digits for the distribution control number can be specified by clicking the [Edit] button.
3-31
3
3.7
Print Operations
Specifying the quality tab settings (PCL driver for Windows)
Adjusting the color and quality
1 2
Item
Click the Quality tab. Specify settings for the following:

Function Specifies the color for printing. Full Color: Prints in color. Grayscale: Prints in grayscale. 2 Color: Prints the two colors selected from the drop-down list. Adjusts the image quality. Simple: Adjusts the entire document. Detail: Adjusts the text, photos, and charts of each object in a document. Specifies the contents of the original document. Prints with a quality suitable for the original document. Document: Prints with a quality suitable for documents with many characters. Photo: Prints with a quality suitable for photos. DTP: Prints with a quality suitable for documents produced using DTP. Web: Prints with a quality suitable for Web page printing. CAD: Prints with a quality suitable for CAD data printing. Displays the resolution. (The resolution cannot be changed on this machine.) Selects the print pattern. Specifies the compression ratio for an image. Prints using a gloss finish.
Select Color
Quality Adjustment
Color Settings
Resolution Pattern Image Compression Glossy Mode
3-32
Print Operations Font Settings You can replace the TrueType fonts used in Windows with the printer fonts of this machine.
1 2 3
Click the Quality tab. Click the [Font Settings] button. Specify settings for the following: Download Font Format: Selects the TrueType font downloading method. Use Printer Fonts: Replaces the TrueType fonts with the printer fonts.
To use the printer fonts, change the fonts in "TrueType Font Substitution Table" as necessary. From the list shown in the dialog box above, select the TrueType font that you want to replace, and then select the printer font from the "Printer Font to Use" drop-down list.
2
Note
Using the printer fonts will shorten the printing time, however, there may be a difference in the screen display and the print results. By selecting the TrueType font download method from the "Download Font Format" drop-down list, you can select the TrueType font type to download when downloading the TrueType fonts and not using the printer fonts. When using TrueType fonts, select the font type to be downloaded to the printer.
3-33
3
3.8 Setting up the PostScript driver for Windows
Print Operations
Function Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings that have been changed. Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed and close the dialog box. Click this button to display the help for each item on the currently displayed dialog box. Click this button to save the current settings and to view them at a later time. Click this button to change the saved settings. Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which were selected when the driver was installed. Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection and check the information of the machine. This is enabled when communication with the machine is possible. When the [Paper View] button is clicked, a preview of the page layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked. When the [Printer View] button is clicked, a printer figure is displayed showing any options, such as the paper tray, that are installed on this machine.
Paper
Printer
2
Note
3-34
Print Operations Basic tab

Item Original Orientation Original Size Paper Size Zoom Paper Tray Paper Type Output Method [User Settings] [Authentication/Account Track] Function Specifies the orientation of the original document. Specifies the size of the original document. Specifies the output paper size. Automatically enlarges or reduces when the Original Size setting is changed. Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio. Selects the paper tray for printing. Selects the paper type for printing. For non-conventional printing, selects special output methods such as "Secure Print" or "Save in User Box".
Specifies the ID and password, or the file name and box number when performing "Secure Print" or "Save in User Box". Specifies the user name and password when performing user authentication, and the department name and password when performing account track on this machine. Specifies the number of copies to print. Specifies whether to print multiple copies in sets. When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set. Specifies the paper type for each paper tray.
Copies Collate Offset Paper Settings for Each Tray
Layout tab
Item Combination Rotate 180 Chapter Print Type Binding Direction Binding Margin Image Shift Function Prints multiple pages on one page. Details can be specified by clicking the [Combination Details] button. Prints the image rotated 180. Specifies the page to be printed on the front side. Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing. Specifies the binding position. Specifies the binding margin. Click the [Binding Margin Settings] button to specify the margin values. Prints by shifting the entire print image. Click the [Image Shift Settings] button to specify the image shift values.
Finish tab
Item Staple Saddle Stitch Punch Fold Output Tray Paper Arrangement Function Specifies stapling. Specifies to saddle stitch a printed document. Specifies hole punching. Specifies folding. Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages. Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position.
3-35
3
Cover mode tab
Item Front Cover Front Cover Tray Back Cover Back Cover Tray Front Cover from Post Inserter Back Cover from Post Inserter Per Page Setting Transparency Interleave Interleave Tray Function Attaches a front cover page. Selects the paper tray for the front cover. Attaches a back cover page. Selects the paper tray for the back cover. Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.)
Print Operations
Inserts paper between pages and switches the paper and tray for each page. Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies. Selects the input tray for the transparency interleaves.
Item Watermark Create Overlay File Copy Protect Date/Time Page Number Header/Footer Function Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the page being printed. Watermarks can be added, changed, or deleted by clicking the [Edit] button. Prints an original document on top of an overlay that was created separately. Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. Prints the date and time. Prints the page number. Prints a header and a footer.
Quality tab
Item Select Color Quality Adjustment Function Specifies the color for printing. Adjusts the image quality. You can select "Simple" to adjust entire documents or "Detailed" to adjust the text, photos, and charts in the document. The profile can also be controlled. Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original document. Prints with a gloss. Download Font Format Use Printer Fonts Selects whether the fonts are downloaded to the printer as bitmap or outline. Selects whether to use TrueType fonts or the printer fonts when printing.
Color Settings Glossy Mode Font Settings
Other tab
Item Excel Job Control Driver Version Info Function Controls jobs so that they are not separated when printing in Microsoft Excel. Displays the version information of the printer driver.
3-36
Print Operations Advanced tab

Item Advanced Printing Features PostScript Output Option Send PostScript Error Handler Mirrored Output PostScript Pass through Function Specifies whether to enable detailed print functions (booklet). Specifies the PostScript file output format.
Specifies whether to print an error report when a PostScript error occurs. Reverses horizontally, then prints. Allows applications to print directly without using a GDI.
Device settings tab

Item Font Substitution Table Available PostScript Memory Output Protocol Send CTRL-D Before Each Job Send CTRL-D After Each Job Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts Job Timeout Wait Timeout Minimum Font Size to Downloaded as Outline Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap Function Specifies the replacement of TrueType fonts with printer fonts. Specifies the usable PostScript memory size. Specifies the protocol for transmitting to the printer. Specifies whether to reset printer before printing. Specifies whether to reset printer after printing. Specifies whether to convert gray text in a document to PostScript gray. Specifies whether to convert gray graphics in a document to PostScript gray. Specifies whether to convert the Euro currency symbol in a document to PostScript fonts. Printer stops printing when a print job is not completed within the specified time. Printer stops printing when the printer does not receive data within the specified time from when the job was sent. Specifies the minimum font size (pixels) when downloading TrueType fonts as outline fonts. Fonts smaller than the minimum specified size are downloaded as bitmap fonts. Specifies the maximum font size (pixels) when downloading TrueType fonts as bitmap fonts. Fonts larger than the maximum specified size are downloaded as outline fonts.
2
Note
To display the Device Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
3-37
3
Configure tab
Item Device Option Function
Print Operations
Specifies the status of the options that are installed on this machine and the status of the user authentication and account track functions. Specify the status of each item from the "Setting" drop-down list. Shows the paper type specified for each tray. Click the [Paper Tray Settings] button to specify the settings for each paper tray. Communicates with this machine to read the status of the installed options. Specifies the status of the connection that executes getting the option information. Enters the encryption passphrase when it is user defined by communicating with this machine. Starts up software tools such as PageScope Web Connection.
Paper Tray Information Acquire Device Information Acquire Settings Encrypt. Passphrase Software Tools
2
Note
To display the Configure tab in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties". You cannot use the [Acquire Device Information] function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine.
Settings tab
Item Display Constraint Message Display paper set in Print Server Properties. Verify Authentication settings before printing Popup Authentication Dialog when printing Function Displays a message when functions that cannot be specified at the same time were enabled from the printer driver. Uses the paper that was added in [Server Properties] of the printer folder. Verifies the authentication settings for this machine before printing and displays a message if the settings are not compatible. Displays the User Authentication/Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified to enter the user name and department name.
2
Note
To display the Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
3-38
Print Operations
3.9
Setting up the PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2

The functions of this machine can be specified on the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes displayed from an application. The settings can only be applied while using the application. When the application is exited, the settings return to their defaults. Page setup dialog box
Page Setup items

Menu Page Attributes Item Paper Orientation Scale PostScript Options Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Invert Image Substitute Fonts Smooth Text Smooth Graphics Precision Bitmap Alignment Unlimited Downloadable Fonts Custom Page Sizes Paper Size Margins Custom Page Size Name Units Function Specifies the paper size. Specifies the orientation. Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio. Prints the image flipped horizontally. Prints the image flipped vertically. Prints a negative image. Replaces some fonts with printer fonts. Smooths text data. Smooths graphic data. Corrects jagged graphic images. Does not limit downloading screen fonts. Specifies any paper size. Specifies the paper margins. Enters the registered name for the specified paper size and margin after the [OK] button is clicked. Selects the specified unit.
2
Note
Depending on the application, "Page Setup" may be displayed as "Paper Setup". In addition, you may have to select "Paper Setup" "Options" from the "File" menu. The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
3-39
3
Print dialog box
Print Operations
Print items
Menu Page Attributes Item Copies Collated Pages Paper Source Color Matching Print Color Intent Printer Profile Background Printing Save as File Print in Print Time Format PostScript Level Data Format Font Inclusion Font Settings Font Documentation Font Downloading Layout Pages per sheet Layout direction Border Job Logging If there is a PostScript error Job Documentation Job Documentation Folder Cover Page Print Cover Page Cover Page Paper Source Function Specifies the number of copies to print. Prints multiple copies in sets. Specifies the print range to print. Selects the paper tray. Specifies the color for printing. Selects the matching method. Specifies the color adjustment profile of the output device. Specifies background printing. Specifies the priority level and print time. Specifies the PostScript file output format. Specifies the PostScript level. Specifies the format to save a document. Specifies whether to include the font data on a file. Adds information to the font key. Specifies the conditions to download fonts. Specifies the number of pages to print on one page. Specifies the page order for printing multiple pages on one page. Specifies the borders around pages. Specifies the PostScript error report conditions. Specifies the conditions for the operation record to be saved. Specifies the folder to which the operation record is to be saved. Attaches a cover. Selects the paper tray for the cover.
3-40
Print Operations
3
Item Offset Output Tray Binding Direction Print Type Combination Staple Punch Fold Front Cover Front Cover Tray Back Cover Back Cover Tray PI Front Cover PI Back Cover Transparency Interleave Interleave Tray Output Method Resolution Select Color Glossy Mode Color Settings Color Matching (Text) Pure Black (Text) Screen (Text) Color Matching (Photo) Pure Black (Photo) Screen (Photo) Smoothing (Photo) Color Settings (Graphic) Smoothing (Graphic) Function Specifies offset. Selects the output tray. Specifies the binding position. Performs duplex printing. Performs booklet printing. Performs stapling. Performs hole punching. Performs folding. Attaches a front cover page. Selects the paper tray for the front cover. Attaches a back cover page. Selects the paper tray for the back cover. Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Inserts interleaves between overhead projector transparencies. Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves. Stops printing temporarily after part of the document has been printed so that the proof print can be checked. Specifies the print resolution. Specifies whether to print in color or grayscale. Prints using a gloss finish. Prints with a quality suitable for the original document. Adjusts the color quality of the text in a document. Specifies whether to enable grayscale of the text in a document. Specifies screening of the text in a document. Adjusts the color quality of photos in a document. Specifies whether to enable grayscale of photos in a document. Specifies screening of photos in a document. Specifies smoothing of photos in a document. Adjusts the color quality of a chart and graph in a document to the text or photo settings. Adjusts the smoothing process of a chart and graph in a document to the text or photo settings.
Menu Finishing Options
2
Note
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
3-41
3
3.10 Page Setup (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2)
Page attributes (basic settings)
Print Operations
1 2
Select "Page Setup" or "Paper Setup" from the [File] menu. Select "Page Attributes".
Specify settings for the following: Paper: Specifies the paper size. Orientation: Specifies the orientation. Scale: Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
2
Note
The folding function can be selected from the screen that is displayed when "Layout" is selected in the Print dialog box.
3-42
Print Operations Custom page sizes
3
Select "Page Setup" or "Paper Setup" from the [File] menu. Select "Custom Page Sizes". Click the [New] button. Specify settings for the following: Paper Size: Specifies the paper size. Margins: Specifies the paper margins. Custom Page Size Name: Enter the registered name for the specified paper size and margins, and then click the [OK] button. Units: Selects the specified unit.
1 2 3 4
Click the [OK] button. This saves the custom page size, which can be selected from the "Paper" drop-down list when "Page Attributes" is selected.
3-43
3
PostScript options
Print Operations
1 2 3
Select "Page Setup" or "Paper Setup" from the [File] menu. Select "PostScript Options". Specify settings for the following: Visual Effects: Provides "Flip Horizontal", "Flip Vertical", and "Invert Image" (negative image). Substitute Fonts: Replaces some fonts with printer fonts. Smooth Text: Smooths text data. Smooth Graphics: Smooths graphic data. Precision Bitmap Alignment: Corrects jagged graphic images. Unlimited Downloadable Fonts: Does not limit downloading screen fonts.
3-44
Print Operations
3.11
Printing (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2)

General (basic settings)
1 2
From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select "General".
Specify settings for the following: Copies: Specifies the number of copies to print. Collated: Prints multiple copies in sets. Pages: Specifies the print range to print. Paper Source: Selects the paper tray.
3-45
3
Layout (printing multiple pages on one page) You can specify to print multiple pages on one page.
Print Operations
1 2 3
From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select "Layout". Specify settings for the following: Pages per sheet: Specifies the number of pages to print on one page. Layout direction: Specifies the page order for printing multiple pages on one page. Border: Specifies the borders around pages.
Printer specific options (Finishing options) You can specify printer-specific options. You can specify these options when using the staple or hole punch functions of this machine.
1 2 3
From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select "Finishing Options". Specify settings for the following: Offset: Specifies offset. Output Tray: Selects the output tray. Binding Direction: Specifies the binding position. Print Type: Performs duplex printing. Combination: Performs booklet printing. Staple: Performs stapling. Punch: Performs hole punching. Fold: Performs folding. Front Cover: Attaches a front cover page. Front Cover Tray: Selects the paper tray for the front cover. Back Cover: Attaches a back cover page. Back Cover Tray: Selects the paper tray for the back cover. PI Front Cover: Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. PI Back Cover: Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. Transparency Interleave: Inserts interleaves between overhead projector transparencies. Interleave Tray: Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves. Output Method: Stops printing temporarily after part of the document has been printed so that the proof print can be checked. Resolution: Specifies the resolution. Select Color: Specifies whether to print in color or grayscale. Glossy Mode: Prints using a gloss finish. Color Settings: Prints with a quality suitable for the original document. Color Matching (Text): Adjusts the color quality of the text in a document. Pure Black (Text): Specifies whether to enable grayscale of the text in a document. Screen (Text): Specifies screening of the text in a document. Color Matching (Photo): Adjusts the color quality of photos in a document.
3-46
Print Operations
3
Pure Black (Photo): Specifies whether to enable grayscale of photos in a document. Screen (Photo): Specifies screening of photos in a document. Smoothing (Photo): Specifies screening of photos in a document. Color Settings (Graphic): Adjusts the color quality of a chart and graph in a document to the text or photo settings. Smoothing (Graphic): Adjusts the smoothing process of a chart and graph in a document to the text or photo settings.
2
Reminder
The staple function is available only when the optional finisher is installed. The hole punch function is available only when the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The folding function is available only when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed.
3-47
3
3.12 Setting options (PPD driver for Mac OS 9.2)
Print Operations
You can specify the options installed on this machine so that they can be used from the printer driver.
2
Reminder
If the installed options on this machine are not set from "Installable Options", the option function cannot be used with the printer driver. When installing options, be sure to make the proper settings.
1 2 3 4
On the Apple menu, click "Chooser". Select the printer name. Click the [Create] button. Click the [Configure] button. The setting screen for adding options appears.
5 6 7
Select the option that is installed on this machine. Click the [OK] button. The Chooser window appears again. Close the Chooser window.
2
Note
The option settings are displayed automatically the first time the printer driver is selected.
3-48
Print Operations
3.13
Setting up the PPD driver for Mac OS X

The functions of this machine can be specified on the Page Setup and Print dialog boxes recalled from the application. The settings can only be applied while using the application. When the application is quit, the settings return to their default settings. Page setup dialog box
Page setup items

Menu Page Attributes Item Paper Size Orientation Scale Custom Paper Size*2 Paper Size (Page size) Printer Margins Function Specifies the paper size. Specifies the orientation. Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio. Specifies any paper size. Specifies the paper margins.
2
Note
Depending on the application, "Page Setup" may be displayed as "Paper Setup". In addition, you may have to select "Paper Setup" "Options" from the "File" menu. The dialog boxes differ depending on the application. The items indicated by *2 are displayed only in Mac OS 10.2 and Mac OS 10.3.
Print dialog box
3-49
3
Print items
Menu Copies & Pages Item Copies Collated Pages Layout Pages per Sheet Layout Direction Border Output Options
*2
Print Operations
Function Specifies the number of copies to print. Prints multiple copies in sets. Specifies the print range to print. Specifies the number of pages to print on one page. Specifies the document page order. Specifies the borders around pages. Saves data to a file. Specifies the format for saving data to a file. Specifies the print time. Specifies the priority level. Prints pages in the reverse order. Selects the pages for printing. Specifies the output paper size. Specifies the color conversion method. Specifies the color for printing. Specifies whether to attach a cover page. Selects to print "Confidential" or other comments on the cover page. Enters the user information used for billing. Specifies whether to print an error report when a PostScript error occurs. Switches the paper source tray. (This function cannot be selected on this machine.) Prints multiple copies in sets. Specifies offset. Specifies output methods, such as "Secure Print" and "Save in User Box". Select to perform user authentication and specify the user name and password. Select to perform account track and specify the department name and password. Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing. Specifies the binding position. Prints one sheet of an original document divided on multiple pages. Prints an overlap width line on split pages. Prints the image rotated 180. Prints by shifting the entire print image. Specifies the page to be printed on the front side. Specifies stapling. Specifies hole punching. Specifies to fold and saddle stitch a printed document. Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position. Selects the paper tray for printing. Selects the paper type for printing. Specifies the paper type for each paper tray. Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages.
Save as File Format
Scheduler *1
Print Document Priority
Paper Handling
*1
Reverse Page Order (Page Order) Print Destination paper size*3
ColorSync*1
Color Conversion Quartz Filter
Cover Page
*1
Print Cover Page Cover Page Type Billing Info
Error Handling
PostScript Errors Tray Switching
Output Method
Collate Offset Output Method User Authentication Account Track
Layout/Finish
Print Type Binding Direction Poster Mode Overlap width line Rotate 180 Image Shift Chapter Staple Punch Saddle Stitch/Fold Paper Arrangement
Paper Tray/Output Tray
Paper Tray Paper Type Paper Settings for Each Tray Output Tray
3-50
Print Operations
3
Item Front Cover Back Cover PI Front Cover PI Back Cover Transparency Interleave Function Attaches a front cover page. Attaches a back cover page. Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. (This function cannot be specified for bizhub C451.) Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies. Inserts paper between pages and switches the paper and tray for each page. Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. Prints the date and time. Prints the page number. Prints a header and a footer. Specifies the color for printing. Prints with a gloss. Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original document. Adjusts the image quality. You can select "Simple" to adjust entire documents or "Detailed" to adjust the text, photos, and charts in the document.
Menu Cover Mode/Transparency Interleave
Per Page Setting Stamp/Composition
Per Page Setting Copy Protect Date/Time Page Number Header/Footer
Quality
Select Color Glossy Mode Color Settings Quality Adjustment
2
Note
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application. The items indicated by *1 are displayed only in Mac OS 10.3 and Mac OS 10.4. The items indicated by *2 are displayed only in Mac OS 10.3. The items indicated by *3 are displayed only in Mac OS 10.4.
3-51
3
Common settings in the print dialog box
Print Operations
The following describes the common settings that are displayed by the specific operations (Output Method, Layout/Finish, Paper Tray/Output Tray, Cover Mode/Transparency Interleave, and Per Page Setting) for this machine.
Item Paper View Detailed Information Printer Information Default
Function A preview of the page layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked. Shows the current settings with text. Displays the status of the installed options. Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which were selected when the driver was installed.
2
Note
Click the [Acquire Device Information] button on the Printer Information dialog box to communicate with this machine and read the status of the settings specified on this machine. You cannot use this function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine.
3-52
Print Operations
3.14
Page setup (PPD driver for Mac OS X)

Page attributes (basic settings)
1 2 3
Select "Page Setup" or "Paper Setup" from the [File] menu. Select "Page Attributes". Specify settings for the following: Paper Size: Specifies the paper size. Orientation: Specifies the orientation. Scale: Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
2
Note
"12 e 18" paper size is one size larger than A3 paper size at 504.8 e 457.2 mm. To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, be sure to set the custom paper sizes in Custom Page Sizes first. When "W" is selected for each standard paper size from the printer driver, the data can be centered and printed. For example, if A4 size data is created and you want to center and print on A3 size paper, select "A4W" as the paper size and "Tray 1" or "Bypass Tray" as the paper tray from the printer driver. To print, load A3 size paper in the tray ("Tray 1" or "Bypass Tray") of this machine that is specified from the printer driver, and then specify the settings described below from [Basic (Paper)] [Change Tray Settings] [Wide Paper] in the control panel. Select "A4W". Enter the A3 paper size (420.0 e 297.0) in [Change Size].
3-53
3
Custom page sizes
Print Operations
1 2 3 4 5
Select "Page Setup" or "Paper Setup" from the [File] menu. For Mac OS 10.4, select "Manage Custom Sizes" from the "Paper Size" drop-down list. For Mac OS 10.2 and Mac OS 10.3, select "Custom Paper Size" from "Settings". Click the [New] (Mac OS 10.2/10.3) or the [+] (Mac OS 10.4) button. Enter the paper size name. Specify settings for the following: Page Size (Paper Size): Specifies any paper size. Printer Margins: Specifies the paper margins.
6 7
For Mac OS X 10.4, continue with step 7. For Mac OS 10.2 and Mac OS 10.3, click the [Save] button. Click the [OK] button. This saves the custom paper size, which can be selected from the "Paper Size" drop-down list that is displayed when "Page Attributes" is selected.
3-54
Print Operations
3.15
Printing (PPD driver for Mac OS X)

General settings
1 2 3
From the [File] menu, select "Print". Select "Copies & Pages". Specify settings for the following: Copies: Specifies the number of copies to print. Collated: Prints multiple copies in sets. Pages: Specifies the print range to print.
3-55
3
3.16 Output Method (PPD driver for Mac OS X)
Print Operations
Collate: Prints multiple copies in sets. Offset: Specifies offset. Output Method: Specifies the output method. For details, refer to "Selecting the output method" on page 3-56. User Authentication: Performs user authentication. For details, refer to "Specifying the user authentication settings" on page 3-59. Account Track: Performs account track. For details, refer to "Specifying the account track settings" on page 3-60. Detail Settings: Displays the functions for which the setting details have been specified. Selecting the output method Not only can you print directly, but you can select "Secure Print", which requires a password to print, or "Save in User Box", which saves data in the boxes that were created on the HDD. From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select the output method. Print: Prints immediately. Secure Print: Saves the document to be printed in "Secure Print User Box" of this machine. When printing, you are required to enter the ID and password in this machines control panel. Select when printing highly confidential documents. Save in User Box: Saves the document to be printed in a box on this machine. Save in User Box and Print: Saves the document in a box and prints at the same time. Proof Print: After a part of the document has been printed, this machine stops printing temporarily. Select to avoid misprinting a large volume of print jobs.
3-56
Print Operations
Secure Print
If "Secure Print" was selected, enter the ID and password in the dialog box that appeared.
2
Note
By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Selecting the output method" on page 3-56. To print, specify "Secure Print Document Box" from the Box mode in this machines control panel, and then enter the ID and password. When password rules are enabled on this machine, the passwords that can be used for secured printing are limited and the jobs are deleted when a password that does not comply with the password rule is entered.
3-57
3
Save in User Box
Print Operations
When "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box and Print" is selected, specify the file name to be saved and the box number for the save location in the dialog box that appears for entering the file name and box number.
2
Note
By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Checking the output method setting details" on page 3-61. Be sure to create the box of the save location in advance with the box function of this machine. When password rules are enabled on this machine, specify the box that was created on this machine. Proof Print
When a print job is sent, this machine stops printing temporarily after part of the document has been printed. The remaining print job is stored in this machine as a print job. When printing multiple copies, you can print the remaining part of the print job after checking the print results.
2
Note
To print the document, release the held document from the Job mode in this machines control panel.
3-58
Print Operations Specifying the user authentication settings If the user authentication settings have been specified on this machine, you must enter a user name and password.
2
Reminder
If a job is printed using a user name or password that is not a registered account on this machine, or if a job is printed without selecting a user under "User Authentication", the operation is not authenticated by this machine and the job is canceled. If the user authentication settings are specified on this machine and the authentication operation restriction function is in mode 2, the applicable user is locked and cannot be accessed if the authentication information is not entered correctly.
1 2
Select the "User Authentication" check box. The User Authentication dialog box appears. Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
2
Note
If this machine has been set to permit public users, the machine can be used without a user name and password. If performing user authentication on a server, the server settings must be specified. Click the [User Authentication Server Setting] button to select the server. By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Checking the output method setting details" on page 3-61. If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even when used by a registered user. For details on the user authentication function, consult the administrator of this machine. If performing user authentication with an optional authentication unit, enter the user name and password in step 2. For details, refer to the operation manual of the authentication unit.
3-59
3
Specifying the account track settings
Print Operations
If the account track settings have been specified on this machine, you must enter a department name and password.
2
Reminder
If a job is printed using a department name or password that is not a registered account on this machine, or if a job is printed without "Account Track" selected, the operation is not authenticated by this machine and the job is canceled. When the account track settings are specified on this machine, the authentication operation restriction function is in mode 2, and the authentication information is not entered correctly, the applicable account is locked and cannot be accessed.
1 2
Select the "Account Track" check box. The Account Track dialog box appears. Enter the department name and password.
2
Note
By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Checking the output method setting details" on page 3-61. If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even when used by a registered account. For details on the account track function, consult the administrator of this machine.
3-60
Print Operations Checking the output method setting details
By clicking the [Detail Settings] button, the "Output Method" functions for which detailed settings have been specified are shown. The settings can be shown by clicking the [Expand All] button. By selecting a function and clicking the [Settings] button, the dialog box for specifying the detailed settings for the selected function appears.
Secure Print: Displays the Secure Print dialog box for entering an ID and password. This is the same dialog box that appears when "Secure Print" is specified from the "Output Method" drop-down list. Save in User Box: Displays the Save in User Box dialog box for entering a file name and box number. This is the same dialog box that appears when "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box and Print" is specified from the "Output Method" drop-down list. User Authentication: Displays the User Authentication dialog box for entering a user name and password. This is the same dialog box that appears when the "User Authentication" check box is selected. Account Track: Displays the Account Track dialog box for entering a department name and password. This is the same dialog box that appears when the "Account Track" check box is selected.
3-61
Print Operations Administrator Settings: Displays the dialog box in which you can change the display of the authentication setting dialog box or in which you can change the encryption passphrase.
Popup Authentication Dialog when printing: Displays the User Authentication dialog box or the Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified to enter a user name or a department name. Encryption Passphrase: Specifies an encryption passphrase when it is user defined by communicating with this machine. The encryption key is automatically generated according to the entered characters and it is used to communicate with this machine.
2
Reminder
Specify "Encryption Passphrase" according to the encryption passphrase that was specified in "Driver Password Encryption Setting" of this machine.
3-62
Print Operations
3.17
Layout/Finish (PPD driver for Mac OS X)

You can switch between the Layout dialog box and the Finish dialog box.
Print Type: Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing. Binding Direction: Specifies the binding position. Poster Mode: Prints one page of an original document divided on multiple pages. Overlap width line: Prints an overlap width line on split pages. This setting can be specified when "Poster Mode" is specified. Rotated 180: Prints the image rotated 180. Image Shift: Prints by shifting the entire print image. For details, refer to "Shifting images" on page 3-65. Chapter: Specifies the page to be printed on the front side. For details, refer to "Chapter" on page 3-66. Staple: Specifies stapling. Select the "Staple" check box, and then specify the number of staples and the stapling position from the drop-down list.
3-63
Print Operations Punch: Specifies hole punching. Select the "Punch" check box, and then specify the number of punched holes from the drop-down list. Saddle Stitch/Fold: Specifies to saddle stitch or fold a printed document. Paper Arrangement: Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position. If "Prioritize Arranging Papers" is selected, all pages can be processed to a suitable quality by this machine because the binding position is adjusted after all the print data is received. If "Prioritize Productivity" is selected, the printing process is performed efficiently because the binding position is adjusted while the data is printed simultaneously as it is being received. Detail Settings: Displays the functions for which the setting details have been specified.
2
Reminder
When printing a job that contains pages of different sizes and orientations with the "Poster Mode" setting specified, images may be missing or overlapping when the document is printed. The staple function is available only when the optional finisher is installed. The hole punch function is available only when the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. The saddle stitch function and the fold funtion are available only when the optional finisher or saddle stitcher on the finisher is installed.
2
Note
The staple and hole-punch position changes according to the binding position specified from "Binding Direction". The fold function cannot be specified when the staple, punch, or saddle stitch function is specified. The center staple function and the thick paper function cannot be specified when finisher FS-608 is installed.
3-64
Print Operations Shifting images
The entire print image of a document is shifted and then printed. You can use this function when you want to adjust the print position.
1 2
Select the "Image Shift" check box. Select the shift direction and set the values. By clearing the "Same value for Front and Back sides" check box, you can set separate values for the front and back sides.
2
Note
By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Checking the layout/finish setting details" on page 3-67.
3-65
3
Chapter
Print Operations
You can specify the page you want to print on the front side when duplex printing or booklet printing. Even if a specified page comes up to be printed on the back side in duplex printing or booklet printing, the specified page is moved and printed on the front side.
1 2
Select the "Chapter" check box. The dialog box for setting the detailed settings appears. Enter the page number of the page you want to print on the front side.
2
Note
When entering multiple page numbers, separate the page numbers with commas such as "2, 4, 6" or enter a page range using a hyphen such as "6-10". The "Chapter" check box can only be selected when the duplex printing or the booklet printing setting is enabled. By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. In addition, if the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Detail Settings] button. For details, refer to "Checking the layout/finish setting details" on page 3-67.
3-66
Print Operations Checking the layout/finish setting details
By clicking the [Detail Settings] button, the "Layout/Finish" functions for which detailed settings have been specified are shown. The settings can be shown by clicking the [Expand All] button. By selecting a function and clicking the [Settings] button, the dialog box for specifying the detailed settings for the selected function appears.
Image Shift: Displays the Image Shift dialog box. This is the same dialog box that appears when the "Image Shift" check box is selected. Chapter: Displays the Chapter dialog box. This is the same dialog box that appears when the "Chapter" check box is selected.
3-67
3
3.18 Paper tray/output tray (PPD driver for Mac OS X)
Print Operations
Paper Tray: Selects the paper tray for printing. Paper Type: Selects the paper type for printing. This setting can be specified when the paper tray setting is set to "Auto". Paper Settings for Each Tray: Specifies the paper type for each paper tray. For details, refer to "Specifying the paper type for a paper tray" on page 3-69. Output Tray: Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages.
2
Note
If "Auto" is specified as the paper tray, you can select the paper type. If the paper tray setting is changed to a setting other than "Auto", the paper type is fixed to its preregistered setting. Specify a paper type by clicking the [Paper Settings for Each Tray] button.
3-68
Print Operations Specifying the paper type for a paper tray You can specify the paper type for a paper tray.
1 2
Click the [Paper Settings for Each Tray] button. The dialog box for setting the detailed settings appears. Select the desired paper tray, and then select the paper type to be specified from the "Paper Type" drop-down list.
2
Note
Click the [Restore Device Status] button to communicate with this machine and read the status of the settings specified on this machine. You cannot use this function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine. By selecting the "Save Settings" check box, the specified settings are saved. Specify "Duplex Side 2" to print on the back side of a page.
3-69
3
3.19
Print Operations
Cover mode/transparency interleave (PPD driver for Mac OS X)

You can switch between the Cover Mode dialog box and the Transparency Interleave dialog box.
Front Cover: Attaches a front cover page. Select this check box, and then select the print conditions from the upper drop-down list, and the paper tray that contains the loaded paper to be used from the lower drop-down list. Back Cover: Attaches a back cover page. Select this check box, and then select the print conditions from the upper drop-down list, and the paper tray that contains the loaded paper to be used from the lower drop-down list. PI Front Cover: Attaches a front cover from the post inserter. Select this check box, and then select the PI tray that contains the loaded paper to be used from the drop-down list. PI Back Cover: Attaches a back cover from the post inserter. Select this check box, and then select the PI tray that contains the loaded paper to be used from the drop-down list. Transparency Interleave: Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies. Select this check box, and then select the paper tray that contains the loaded paper to be used from the lower drop-down list.
3-70
Print Operations
3
Note
2
To print on the front cover and back cover, select "Print". To only add a blank page, select "Blank". The PI Front Cover function and the PI Back Cover function are available only when an optional post inserter is installed. The PI Front Cover function and the PI Back Cover function cannot be specified when the Front Cover function and the Back Cover function are specified. The "Transparency Interleave" setting can be specified if "Transparency" is selected as the paper type.
3-71
3
3.20 Per page setting (PPD driver for Mac OS X)
Print Operations
You can specify the print type and paper tray for each page. This comes in handy when you want to change the paper tray during a print job when printing multiple pages. The settings are added to the per page setting list and can be used as necessary.
Per Page Setting: Enables the per page setting function. List: Displays the list of the settings that have been added to Per Page Setting. Add: Adds settings to Per Page Setting. For details, refer to "Adding and editing the settings in per page setting" on page 3-73. Edit: Edits the settings in Per Page Setting. For details, refer to "Adding and editing the settings in per page setting" on page 3-73. Delete: Deletes the settings in Per Page Setting. +/,: Changes the order of the per page setting list.
3-72
Print Operations Adding and editing the settings in per page setting
3
Select the "Per Page Setting" check box. Click the [Add] button to add a new setting to the list. To edit the list, select the desired name in the list, and then click the [Edit] button. The Per Page Settings dialog box for specifying the print settings appears.
1 2
Click the [Add] button to add the setting to the list. A new row for specifying the settings is added to the settings list.
Select the row that was added to the list, and then specify the print settings in "Add/Edit". Page Number: Enters the page number. When entering multiple page numbers, separate the page numbers with commas such as "2, 4, 6" or enter a page range using a hyphen such as "6-10". Print Type: Specifies Print Insert, Insert Blank Sheet, Print (1-Sided), and Print (2-Sided). Paper Tray: Specifies the paper tray. Staple: Specifies the number of staples and the stapling position.
2
Note
To change existing print settings, select the desired row and change the settings. To delete existing print settings, select the desired row, and then click the [Delete] button. Click the [+] button or the [,] button to change the page number starting with the smallest page number. The name of the list can be changed in the "List Name:" text box.
3-73
3
3.21 Stamp/Composition (PPD driver for Mac OS X)
Print Operations
Copy Protect: Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. Date/Time: Prints the date and time. Page Number: Prints the page number. Header/Footer: Prints a header and a footer.
3-74
Print Operations Printing with copy protection You can print a special pattern on an entire page while printing. When copying a printed page, the characters embedded in the pattern appear to prevent an illegal copy.
1 2
Select the "Copy Protect" check box. The Copy Protect dialog box appears. Specify the copy protection type and the position. Multiple print items can be specified.
Characters: Embeds the selected character string in a pattern. A preregistered character string (common stamp) or a character string registered on this machine (registered stamp) can be specified. Date/Time: Embeds the selected date and time in a pattern. Serial Number: Embeds the serial number of this machine in a pattern. Distribution Control Number: Embeds the number of copies in a pattern when printing multiple copies. The start number or the number of digits that are displayed can be specified. Job Number: Embeds the print job number in a pattern for documents that are automatically paginated. Text Size: Specifies the text size of a pattern. Angle: Specifies the pattern angle.
3-75
3
3
Print Operations Select the composition method for copy protection. Select "Copy Protect" to specify the desired results when copying, or simply select "Repeatable Stamp". In addition, you can select the embedding conditions.
Pattern: Specifies the embedding method of a pattern. Pattern Overwrite: Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original document. Background Pattern: Specifies the pattern background. Adjust Color: Specifies the color of the pattern.
2
Note
If the "Do not show this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when this function is specified. The dialog box can be displayed by clicking the [Settings] button.
3-76
Print Operations Printing the date and time You can print the date and time on a document.
1 2
Select the "Date/Time" check box. The Date/Time dialog box appears. Specify the format and print position for the date and time.
Format: Displays the format for the date and time to be printed. Pages to Print: Specifies the pages to print the date and time. Text Color: Specifies the text color to print. Print Position: Specifies the print position.
2
Note
3-77
3
Printing the page numbers You can print the page numbers on a document.
Print Operations
1 2
Select the "Page Number" check box. The Page Number dialog box appears. Specify the format and print position for the printing the page number.
Starting Page: Specifies the page to start printing the page number. Starting Page Number: Specifies the start number for printing the page number. Cover Mode: If cover pages are attached, specifies whether to print the page number on the front cover page or the back cover page. Text Color: Specifies the text color to print. Print Position: Specifies the print position.
2
Note
3-78
Print Operations Printing a header and a footer You can print a header and a footer on a document.
1 2
Select the "Header/Footer" check box. The Header/Footer dialog box appears. Specify the print settings and pages for the header and the footer. Recall Header/Footer: Select the header and the footer setting that is registered in this machine. Distribution Control Number: Displays the number of the copy in the header or the footer when printing multiple copies. The start number or the number of digits that are displayed can be specified. Pages: Specifies the pages to print the header or the footer. Text Color: Specifies the color of the text for printing.
2
Note
3-79
3
3.22 Quality (PPD driver for Mac OS X)
Print Operations
Select Color: Specifies whether to print in color or grayscale. Glossy Mode: Prints with a gloss. Color Settings: Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original document. Document: Prints with a quality suitable for documents with many characters. Photo: Prints with a quality suitable for photos. DTP: Prints with a quality suitable for documents produced using DTP. Web: Prints with a quality suitable for Web page printing. CAD: Prints with a quality suitable for CAD data printing. Quality Adjustment: Adjusts the image quality. Specifies the color matching and the profile for the text, photos, and charts of each object in a document document.
3-80
Print Operations
3.23
Sending a fax
Fax operations
2
Reminder
To use the fax function, you must install the optional fax kit onto this machine. In addition, you must enable the fax kit on the Configure tab after installation.
1 2 3 4
Create the data you want to send using any application. From the [File] menu, select "Print". From "Printer Name", select "CXXX FAX". Click the [Preferences] button or the [Properties] button to change the fax driver settings as necessary. By clicking the [Preferences] button or the [Properties] button in the Print dialog box, you can specify the settings of each model in the fax Printing Preferences dialog box that appears. For details, refer to "Setting up the fax driver for Windows" on page 3-88.
5 6
Click the [Print] button. The Fax Transmission Popup dialog box appears. Enter the recipients name and fax number in the "Name" and "FAX Number" text boxes.
Click the [Add Recipients] button. To add multiple recipients, repeat steps 6 and 7. Up to 100 recipients can be added. To delete a recipient from the list, click the [Delete From List] button.
If necessary, click the [Fax Mode Setting Details] button to specify the fax mode setting details, or select the "FAX Cover Sheet" check box to create a fax cover sheet. For details, refer to "Specifying the transmission settings" on page 3-84, or "Creating a fax cover sheet" on page 3-85.
3-81
3
9
Click the [OK] button. The fax data is sent via this machine.
Print Operations
2
Note
Up to 80 characters can be entered in the "Name" text box. Up to 38 characters (numbers 0 through 9, hyphens (-), #, *, P, and T) can be entered in the "FAX Number" text box. To send a fax overseas, be sure to enter the country code first. Change the transmission mode as necessary. ECM: Specifies the ECM (Error Correction Mode). If the "V.34 Mode" check box is selected, the "ECM" check box cannot be cleared. International Transmission Mode: Slows the speed when sending faxes overseas. Select this check box if errors occur when sending faxes overseas. V.34 Mode: Specifies the Super G3 fax mode. For normal fax operations, leave this check box selected. Clear it only if it is not possible to transmit in the recipients mode. The fax numbers that are registered in the phone book can be specified by clicking the [Add From Phone Book] button. For details, refer to "Selecting a recipient from the phone book" on page 3-83. The names and fax numbers that were entered can be added to the phone books "Simple Entry" folder by clicking the [Register To Phone Book] button.
3-82
Print Operations Selecting a recipient from the phone book
2
Note
To use the phone book, the names and fax numbers of the recipients must be added to the phone book first. For details, refer to "Adding a recipient to the phone book" on page 3-91.
When sending a fax, click the [Add From Phone Book] button in the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. To open the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box, follow steps 1 to 5 under "Fax operations". For details, refer to "Fax operations" on page 3-81.
Select "Personal List" or "Group" from the list on the left side of the dialog box to display the desired recipient in "Personal Information". Click the [Find] button to specify the conditions to search for a recipient.
Select the name of the recipient you want to send a fax to, and then click the [Add Recipients] button. Multiple recipients can be added in the same way. Up to 100 recipients can be added. To delete a recipient, click the [Delete] button.
3-83
Print Operations If recipients have been added to a group, all the members of the group can be added to "Recipient List" (group transmission) by selecting a group name, then clicking the [Add Recipients] button.
Click the [OK] button. The names that were specified are added to "Recipient List" and the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box appears again.
Specifying the transmission settings When sending a fax, you can specify the transmission settings in the Fax Mode Details dialog box that appears when the [Fax Mode Setting Details] button is clicked in the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box.
Print Recipient File: Prints the document after a fax was sent. Timer Send: Sets the transmission time. By clicking the [Reflect Current Time] button, the current time set on the computer is displayed in the "Send Time" boxes. SUB Address: Specifies the sub address for sending confidential faxes using F-codes. Sender ID: Specifies the sender ID for sending confidential faxes using F-codes.
2
Note
When using Timer Send, check that the time set on the computer is synchronized with the time on this machine. If the transmission time is earlier than the current time of this machine, the fax is sent the next day. If sending confidential faxes using F-codes to another fax model, enter the sub address and sender ID in the "SUB Address" and the "Sender ID" text boxes. Up to 20 characters (numbers 0 through 9) can be entered in the "Sub Address" text box. Up to 20 characters (numbers 0 through 9, #, and *) can be entered in the "Sender ID" text box.
3-84
Print Operations Creating a fax cover sheet
When sending a fax, you can attach a cover sheet to the fax message by selecting the "FAX Cover Sheet" check box in the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. You can edit the cover sheets from the Fax Cover Sheet Settings dialog box that appears by clicking the [Settings] button in the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. In the Fax Cover Sheet Settings dialog box, you can change the settings on the Basic, Recipient, Sender, or Image tab by switching between each screen.
1 2 3
Select the "FAX Cover Sheet" check box in the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. Click the [Settings] button. The Fax Cover Sheet Settings dialog box appears. Select the size of the cover sheet from the "Cover Size" drop-down list.
On the Basic tab, specify the format of the cover sheet and subject of the fax. Style: Selects the format design of the cover sheet. Subject: Enters the subject of the fax to be sent. Up to 64 characters can be entered in the "Subject" text box. Date: Specifies the date. Select a format or enter any format. If entering a format, up to 20 characters can be entered in the "Input Arbitrarily" text box. Pages: Specifies the number of pages to be sent. Comment: Enters the text to be displayed in the comment box. Up to 640 characters can be entered in the "Comment" text box, and returns are converted into two characters.
3-85
3
5
Specify the recipient information on the Recipient tab.
Print Operations
Standard: Specifies standard text. Details: Specifies the details described under "Recipient Setting Details". Load with Joint Name: Lists the recipient with joint names. The items listed are the items shown under "Recipient List" on the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. Change Each Recipient: Changes the description for each recipient. The items listed are the items shown under "Recipient List" on the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box. Load Set Information: Lists the information that was entered in the "Company", "Department", "Name", and "FAX Number" text boxes. Read: Reads the information of the first recipient to the information box. Up to 40 separate cover sheets can be created if "Change Each Recipient" is selected. Even if "Change Each Recipient" is selected, the first recipient is displayed as a sample in "Preview". If "Load with Joint Name" and "Change Each Recipient" are selected, the names that were added are entered, but titles cannot be added. If a recipient is not specified on the Fax Transmission Popup dialog box, "Load Set Information" cannot be selected. In addition, it cannot be selected on the fax tab in the Fax Printing Preferences dialog box as well.
Specify the sender information on the Sender tab. Select the check box of the information to be listed, and then enter the information.
3-86
Print Operations
3
To place graphics such as a company logo or map on a cover sheet, specify the image file on the Image tab. Select the "Zoom" check box to specify the size, and set the position with the values in the "X" and "Y" boxes.
Check the specified settings. Click the [Check] button to check an enlarged preview image. Click the [Add] button to save the cover sheet settings. The settings can then be recalled from the "Cover Sheet Settings" drop-down list the next time a cover sheet is used.
3-87
3
3.24 Setting up the fax driver for Windows
Print Operations
Function Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings that have been changed. Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed and close the dialog box. Click this button to display the help for each item on the currently displayed dialog box. Click this button to save the current settings and to view them at a later time. Click this button to change the saved settings. Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which were selected when the driver was installed. Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection and check the information of the machine. This is enabled when communication with the machine is possible. A preview of the page layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked.
2
Reminder
3-88
Print Operations Fax tab

Item Resolution Print Recipient File Timer Send SUB Address Sender ID Cover Sheet Phone Book Entry Function Specifies the fax resolution. Prints the document after the fax was sent. Sets the transmission time. By clicking the [Reflect Current Time] button, the current time set on the computer is displayed in the "Send Time" boxes. Specifies the sub address for sending confidential faxes using F-codes. Specifies the sender ID for sending confidential faxes using F-codes. Specifies the fax cover sheet. Edits the phone book.
Basic tab
Item Original Orientation Original Size Paper Size Zoom [Authentication/Account Track] Function Specifies the orientation of the original document. Specifies the size of the original document. Specifies the output paper size of the recipient. Automatically enlarges or reduces when the Original Size setting is changed. Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio. Specifies the user name and password when performing user authentication, and the department name and password when performing account track on this machine.
Layout tab
Item Combination Function Prints multiple pages on one page, or prints one sheet of an original document divided on multiple pages. Details can be specified by clicking the [Combination Details] button. Does not print blank pages in the data.
Skip Blank Pages
Item Watermark Function Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the page being printed. Watermarks can be added, changed, or deleted by clicking the [Edit] button.
Configure tab
Item Device Option Function Specifies the status of the options that are installed on this machine and the status of the user authentication and account track functions. Specify the status of each item from the "Setting" drop-down list. Communicates with this machine to read the status of the installed options. Specifies the status of the connection that executes getting the option information. Enter an encryption passphrase when it is defined by the user through communication with this machine.
Acquire Device Information Acquire Settings Encryption Passphrase
2
Note
To display the Configure tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the "CXXX FAX" icon, and then click "Properties". You cannot use the [Acquire Device Information] function if you are not connected to or able to communicate with this machine.
3-89
3
Settings tab
Item Display Constraint Message Display paper set in Print Server Properties Verify Authentication settings before printing Popup Authentication Dialog when printing Function
Print Operations
Displays a message when functions that cannot be specified at the same time were enabled from the printer driver. Uses the paper that was added in [Server Properties] of the printer folder. Verifies the authentication settings for this machine before printing and displays a message if the settings are not compatible. Displays the User Authentication/Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified to enter the user name and department name.
2
Note
To display the Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003/Vista, right-click the "CXXX FAX" icon, and then click "Properties".
3-90
Print Operations
3.25
Using a phone book

Adding a recipient to the phone book When sending a fax, you can recall the fax numbers that are used frequently by adding them to a phone book. A phone book can be added from the fax tab in the fax Printing Preferences dialog box.
From the fax tab in the fax Printing Preferences dialog box, click the [Phone Book Entry] button. The Phone Book Entry dialog box appears.
2 3
From the left side of the dialog box, select "Personal List", and then click the [Add New] button. The Personal Information\\Personal List dialog box appears. Enter the appropriate information in the "Name", "Fax Number", "Company", and "Department" text boxes.
If entering a name for a fax cover sheet, titles cannot be added. To add a title to a fax cover sheet, add the title in the "Name" text box. Up to 80 characters can be entered in the "Name", "Company", and "Department" text boxes. Up to 38 characters (numbers 0 through 9, hyphens (-), spaces, #, *, E, P, and T) can be entered in the "Fax Number" text box. To send a fax overseas, be sure to enter the country code first.
3-91
Print Operations Change the transmission mode as necessary. ECM: Specifies the ECM (Error Correction Mode). If the "V.34 Mode" check box is selected, the "ECM" check box cannot be cleared. International Transmission Mode: Slows the speed when sending faxes overseas. Select this check box if errors occur when sending faxes overseas. V.34 Mode: Specifies the Super G3 fax mode. For normal fax operations, leave this check box selected. Clear it only if it is not possible to transmit in the recipients mode.
To add a recipient to a group, select the check box of the group to be added. If adding a recipient to a group, you can specify the recipient in a group (group transmission). To send faxes to specific members, it comes in handy to add them to a group. Multiple groups can be selected and added. The group name can be changed.
Click the [OK] button. The information of the recipient is registered and it is added to "Personal Information". If a group was specified, the group that was added also appears in "Group".
Click the [OK] button. If a name was added, the editing of the phone book is complete. The first time you register a phone book, a dialog box to confirm whether you want to save the phone book appears. Click the [Yes] button. The Save As dialog box appears.
Specify the storage location, enter the file name, and then click the [Save] button. The phone book is saved as a file.
3-92
Print Operations
3
Note
2
The Save As dialog box appears when a phone book is registered for the first time. The Save As dialog box does not appear from the second time the phone book is changed and thereafter since the phone book file is automatically overwritten. The saved phone book file automatically appears the next time you open the phone book. To open a different phone book, select "Open" from the "File" menu in the Phone Book Entry dialog box. If multiple phone books have been saved, you can use the phone books by switching between them. A new phone book can be created by clicking "New" from the "File" menu in the Phone Book Entry dialog box. You can save a file under a different name by clicking "Save As" from the "File" menu. The file extension for the phone book files is ".csv".
Editing a phone book You can easily change the personal information that was registered, change the group names, edit, or organize the phone books. To change the personal information: Select the name you want to change from "Personal List" on the left side of the dialog box, and then click the [Edit] button on the right. The same Personal Information\\Personal List dialog box that appeared when you registered the phone book appears, allowing you to change the information. You can select the name that you want to change from "Personal List" on the left side of the dialog box, and you can delete a recipient by clicking the [Delete] button on the right. If a recipient is deleted, it is also deleted from the registered group.
2
Note
When sending a fax, the names and fax numbers that were entered manually and registered by clicking the [Register To Phone Book] button, appear in the "Simple Entry" folder of the phone book.
3-93
3
To change a registered recipient to a group %
Print Operations
From "Personal List" on the left side of the dialog box, select the name you want to change, and then select or clear the check box of the group under the "Select Group" drop-down list.
2
Note
A recipient can even be added to a group by dragging the recipients name from "Personal List" on the left side of the dialog box to the desired group. However, the name cannot be dragged out of the group. Up to 100 recipients can be added to a group.
To change a group name % Select the group that you want to change from "Group" on the left side of the dialog box, and then specify "Change Group Name" from the "Edit" menu.
To create a folder % Select "Personal List" on the left side of the dialog box, and then specify "Add Folder" from the "Edit" menu. You can move names from "Personal List" by dragging them to a folder.
2
Note
Names can also be moved to the desired folder by right-clicking a name and selecting "Copy" or "Cut", then selecting "Paste" on the target folder. Up to 40 characters can be entered for the folder name. A folder can be up to three layers deep. To edit a folder, select the desired folder, and then click the [Edit] button. To delete a folder, select the desired folder, and then click the [Delete] button.
To search the personal information % Click the [Find] button on the left side of the dialog box to display the Find dialog box where the search conditions can be specified.
3-94
Box Operations
Box Operations
4
4.1
Box Operations
Saving copies in user boxes
Settings that can be saved and changed Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies, there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below.
Function type Function Number of copies Paper tray selection Output tray selection Basic screen settings Color Paper Zoom Original > Copy bizhub C451: Center Staple/Fold Fold/Bind Collate/Group Punch Staple Duplex/Combine Quality/Density Combine Original Type Density Background Adjustment Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Edit Color Page Margin Stamp/Composition Can be saved e o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Can be set when printing o e e e e e o o o o o o e e e e o e o o
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind and Center Staple/Fold settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the optional finisher and the punch kit are installed.
4-3
4
Saving copy documents
Box Operations
Copy documents can be saved in user boxes. Specify the following information when saving copy documents.
Parameter User Box Document Name Save & Print Description Specify the user box where the data is to be saved. Type in 30 characters or less for the name of the document to be saved. To make copies of the document while saving it, touch [Yes].
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box
1 2 3
Press the [Copy] key in the control panel. Touch [Application]. Touch [Save in User Box].
The Save in User Box screen appears.
Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box].
4-4
Box Operations
4
Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then touch the button for the user box to select it. To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box. The button for the selected user box appears selected.
?
6 7
Is a password required when saving data? % It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified for the user box.
Touch [OK]. Specify the name of the document to be saved. To change the automatically specified name, touch [Document Name].
After typing in the name, touch [OK]. To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
4-5
4
9 10 11 12 13
Touch [OK]. Specify the necessary copy settings. If a User Box function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected.
Box Operations Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes].
Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Press the [Start] key in the control panel. If "Yes" was selected beside "Save & Print", the scanned document is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box. If "No" was selected beside "Save & Print", the scanned document data is saved in the specified user box.
!
Detail
For details on printing the document saved in a user box, refer to "Overview of document printing" on page 4-35.
4-6
Box Operations
4.2
Saving scans in user boxes

Scanned images can be saved in user boxes. User box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a user box destination can be specified directly. The following procedures describe how to select a user box destination, how to specify a user box destination directly, and how to save from User Box mode.
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box (only when entered directly)
Using a user box destination A destination where a user box has been registered is called a "user box destination". User box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated by "User Box" as the destination type. The following procedure describes how to select a previously registered user box destination for saving data.
2
Note
If a user box destination is used, the document is automatically saved with the default name.
1 2
Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears. Touch [Address Book]. The registered destinations are displayed.
Touch the button for the user box destination to select it.
4-7
4
4 5 6
Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Press the [Start] key in the control panel. The document is scanned and the data is saved. Entering destinations directly Using the control panel to directly type in the user box destination is called "direct input".
Box Operations
2
Note
If "Manual Destination Input" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Restrict", [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 2
Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears. Touch [Direct Input].
Touch [User Box].
The User Box screen appears.
4-8
Box Operations
4
Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box]. To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [Scan Settings], then [Application], and then touch [Annotation] to select the user box.
Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected.
Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. The default name appears beside "Document Name". To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
4-9
4
7
Type in the document name, and then touch [OK].
Box Operations
Touch [OK]. The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified user box appears under "Broadcast Destinations".
9 10 11
Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission, but multiple e-mail and fax destinations can be specified.
Saving in user box mode Press the [User Box] key in the control panel, and then directly type in the user box destination. Documents to be saved can be used in the same way as saved scan data.
1 2
Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. Touch [Save Document].
4-10
Box Operations
4
Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box. To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user box. To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.]. The button for the selected user box appears selected.
4 5
Touch [OK]. The Save Document screen appears. Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name]. The default name appears beside "Document Name". To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings.
4-11
4
8 9
Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
Box Operations
2
Note
Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission.
Saving on external memory from User Box mode If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, external memory can be connected for saving scanned documents.
!
Detail
The default setting for saving a document to external memory is "OFF" (cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is "OFF" (cannot be saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator mode so that documents can be saved.
1 2
Press the [User Box] key in the control panel. The User Box Operations screen appears. Touch [Save Document].
Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory].
Touch [OK].
4-12
Box Operations
4
Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document Name].
The default name appears beside "Document Name". To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then type in the new name. To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
7 8 9
Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings. Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
4-13
4
4.3 Saving printouts in user boxes
Box Operations
If the printer driver for this machine is installed on a computer on the network, the document can be saved in a user box with the same operation for printing it.
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. The user box number must be entered in order to save the document. Public user boxes Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified) Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified) Annotation User Box
Saving data in a user box
1 2
In the application, click "Print" on the "File" menu. Click the [Properties] button beside the printer name.
4-14
Box Operations
4
From the "Output Method" list, select "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print".
In the User Settings dialog box, type the file name and box number, and then click the [OK] button.
4-15
4
5
Box Operations
Click the [OK] button to start printing.
!
Detail
If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information.
Saving data in the secure print user box
1 2
In the application, click "Print" on the "File" menu. Click the [Properties] button beside the printer name.
4-16
Box Operations
4
From the "Output Method" list, select "Secure Print".
In the User Settings dialog box, type the ID and password for the confidential document, and then click the [OK] button.
4-17
4
5
Box Operations
Click the [OK] button to start printing.
!
Detail
If user authentication and account track settings have been specified, click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user name for logging on and account information.
Saving data in the encrypted PDF user box A command for saving a file in a user box cannot be specified from the printers Properties dialog box for a PDF file that requires a password to be en-tered in order for it to be opened. To print from this machine, the file must be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box. The file can be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box in either of the following two ways. Saving from PageScope Direct Print Saving with direct printing from PageScope Web Connection When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it. When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine, and then print the document.
!
Detail
For details on PageScope Direct Print, refer to the corresponding manual. For details on printing a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, refer to "Encrypted PDF user box" on page 4-57.
4-18
Box Operations
4.4
Overview of document organizing

Available operations in the file document screen The following operations can be performed from the File Document screen.
Operation Delete Edit Name Move Copy Document Details Description Data that is no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed or transmitted, can be deleted. The name of a saved document can be changed. Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. Document data currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box. The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. Page reference p. 4-24 p. 4-25 p. 4-27 p. 4-29 p. 4-31
From the File Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be organized. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below.
Operation Delete Edit Name Move Copy Document Details Public/personal/group user boxes o o o o o Annotation User Box o o e e o Secure Print User Box o o e e o
!
Detail
Documents can be moved or copied between public user boxes, personal user boxes and group user boxes. When organizing documents in the Secure Print User Box, the ID and password for the confidential document must be entered.
4-19
4
Checking documents saved in user boxes The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved in a user box.
Box Operations
Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
Touch [File Document].
From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box. The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user that is logged on with user authentication. The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the user belongs to when account track settings are specified.
Touch [OK].
4-20
Box Operations
4
If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and then touch [OK].
The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed.
2
Note
If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect bpx password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
4-21
4
Description of file document screen
Box Operations
As a default, thumbnails of the saved documents and the document names are displayed. The following information is displayed.
A thumbnail of the first page is displayed.
The document name is displayed.
The number of pages is displayed.
To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the document name, touch [Detail View].
The name of the user who stored the document and the mode when the document was registered are displayed.
The document name is displayed.
The date/time when the document was stored is displayed. Touch to switch between displaying the list in ascending or descending order.
4-22
Box Operations Searching for a user box name The desired user box can be searched for by its name.
From the screen containing a list of the user boxes, touch [Search User Box].
The user boxes for each index character appear.
Touch the button for an index character to display the list of user boxes registered with that index character.
!
Detail
A user box name can be searched for from the Save Document screen, Use Document screen or File Document screen. The personal user boxes and group user boxes that can be accessed when a user is logged on are also displayed.
4-23
4
4.5 Deleting a document
Box Operations
From the File Document screen, documents that are no longer needed, for example, documents that have already been printed, can be deleted.
From the File Document screen, select the document to be deleted. Multiple documents can be selected. To select all documents, touch [Select All]. To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset].
Touch [Delete].
Check the document information that appeared, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK] to delete the document.
The documents are deleted.
4-24
Box Operations
4.6
Changing the document name

The name of a saved document can be changed.
From the File Document screen, select the document to be renamed. A name cannot be changed if multiple documents are selected.
Touch [Edit Name].
The current name appears.
Type in the new name.
4-25
4
4
Touch [Start].
Box Operations
2
Note
The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP, SMB or WebDAV server. Specify a document name according to the conditions of the destination server when transmitting. The document name can also be changed when the document is transmitted.
4-26
Box Operations
4.7
Moving a document
Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box.
2
Note
A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected.
From the File Document screen, select the document to be moved.
Touch [Move].
Specify the user box where the document is to be moved.
? %
Is a password required for moving data to a different user box? It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box.
4-27
4
4
Check the information, and then touch [Start].
Box Operations
The data is moved, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed.
Touch [OK].
2
Note
The date and time that the document was moved is recorded under "Time Stored".
4-28
Box Operations
4.8
Duplicating a document
Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box.
2
Note
A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected.
From the File Document screen, select the document to be copied.
Touch [Copy].
Specify the user box where the document is to be copied.
? %
Is a password required for copying data to a different user box? It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box.
4-29
4
4
Check the information, and then touch [Start].
Box Operations
The data is copied, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed.
Touch [OK].
2
Note
The date and time that the document was copied is recorded under "Time Stored".
4-30
Box Operations
4.9
Checking document details

The details of saved documents can be checked from the touch panel. The following information can be checked from the Document Details screen.
Item Registered Time User Name Document Name No. of Pages Job No. [Preview] button Description Displays the date and time that the document was stored. Displays the mode (Scan, Copy or Print) and name of the user who stored the document. Displays the name of the document. Displays the number of pages in the document. Displays the job number when the document was stored. Touch this button to display the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. For details, refer to "Preview screen operations" on page 4-33.
!
Detail
The preview screen can be displayed by touching a button in the sub display area or by touching a button in the Document Details screen.
Check the details
2
Note
Multiple documents can be selected.
From the File Document screen, select the document to be checked.
Touch [Document Details].
The Document Details screen appears.
4-31
4
3
Check the details of the document.
Box Operations
To select multiple documents, touch and to display different screens. To display the preview, touch [Preview]. To perform the operation from the sub display area, touch [Preview] in the sub display area, and then touch [Detail].
After checking the document, touch [Close].
4-32
Box Operations Preview screen operations
Touching [Enlarged Thumbnail View] in the Document Details screen displays the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. The image can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. The procedure for checking the image at a size of 4 times the normal size is described below.
!
Detail
With documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first page can be checked. The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.
The image is displayed at full size in the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. Touch [4e Zoom].
The image is displayed at a size 4 times the normal size, and the enlarged area is indicated by a green frame.
To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the right side and at the bottom of the image. When the selection is moved to the right:
4-33
4
When the selection is moved down:
Box Operations
After checking the image, touch [Close].
4-34
Box Operations
4.10
Overview of document printing

Available operations in the use document screen The following operations can be performed from the Use Document screen.
Operation Print Description Documents saved in user boxes in Copy mode, Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. Documents saved in user boxes in Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be sent by e-mail. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed. Multiple documents within the same user box can be combined and transmitted. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted. The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked. p. 4-31 p. 4-44 Page reference p. 4-38
Send
Combine
Bind TX
Document Details
From the Use Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can be printed and transmitted. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below.
Operation Public/personal/group user boxes o o o o o Annotation User Box o o e e o Secure Print User Box o e e e o Encrypted PDF User Box o e e e o
Print Send Combine Bind TX Document Details
4-35
4
Box Operations
Touch [Use Document].
Touch [OK].
4-36
Box Operations
4
2
Note
If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Description of use document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to "Description of file document screen" on page 4-22. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to "Searching for a user box name" on page 4-23.
4-37
4
4.11 Printing
Available print settings Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
Available parameters Copies Print Finishing Page Margin Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Stamp/Composition Description Specify the number of copies to be printed. Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching, folding/binding or center stapling/folding. Print the document with a binding margin added. Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added.
Box Operations
Page reference p. 4-39 p. 4-39 p. 4-40
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind and Center Staple/Fold settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher. For details on combining multiple documents and printing, refer to "Combined printing" on page 4-44.
To print a document
From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed.
Under "Action", touch [Print].
4-38
Box Operations
4
Select the print settings.
Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with page 4-39.
Changing the number of copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. % In the Print screen, use the keypad to type in the desired number of copies.
The number of copies can be set between 1 and 9,999. To reset the number of copies to "1", press the [C] (clear) key.
Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be printed. % Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided].
4-39
4
Specifying finishing settings
Box Operations
Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching, folding/binding or center stapling/folding. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Sort Group Offset Description Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by sets. Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by page. Select this setting to separate the sets or pages of the copies. If a finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out with each set shifted to separate it. If no finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern. Select one of these settings to bind copies with a staple in the corner (upper left or upper right) or with two staples. The stapling position can also be selected. Select a setting to punch holes in copies. The position of the punched holes can also be selected. Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.
Staple Punch Half-Fold (Fold/Bind) Half-Fold (Center Staple/ Fold)
Center Staple & Fold (Fold/Bind)
Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center, then fold the copies in half before feeding them out.
Center Staple (Center Staple/Fold) Center Staple & Fold (Fold/Bind)
Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center before feeding them out.
Tri-fold (Fold/Bind)
Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out.
!
Detail
The feeding method when a finisher is installed can be changed from Administrator mode. When a Fold/Bind or Center Staple/Fold setting is selected, "Sort" is automatically selected, and the "Group", Offset, Staple and Punch settings are canceled.
4-40
Box Operations
4
Reminder
2
In order to select a Fold/Bind or a Center Staple/Fold setting, all of the following conditions must be met. The paper width must be between 182 and 314 mm. The paper length must be between 257 and 458 mm. In order to use a Fold/Bind or a Center Staple/Fold setting, an optional finisher must be installed.
In the Print screen, touch [Finishing].
Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset".
Select the desired Staple and Punch settings.
To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting].
4-41
4
5
Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK]. When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected:
Box Operations
When the "2 Positions" Staple setting is selected:
When a Punch setting is selected:
If finisher FS-608 is installed, touch [Fold/Bind]. If finisher FS-519 is installed, touch [Center Staple/Fold].
4-42
Box Operations
4
If [Fold/Bind] was touched, touch [Yes], and then select the desired folding method.
If [Center Staple/Fold] was touched, touch [Yes], and then select the desired folding method.
To adjust the position of the center stapling and center fold, touch [Position Adjustment], and then specify an adjustment between -10 and +10.
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
4-43
4
4.12 Combined printing
Available combined printing parameters
Box Operations
Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together. Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified for the selected document. Settings can be specified for the following.
Available parameters Copies Print Finishing Page Margin Stamp/Composition Description Specify the number of copies to be printed. Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Specify settings for offsetting, stapling, hole punching, folding/binding or center stapling/folding. Print the document with a binding margin added. Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. Page reference p. 4-39 p. 4-39 p. 4-40
2
Note
Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings specified cannot be combined and printed. "Sort", "Group" and "Tri-fold" cannot be specified with combined printing.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind and Center Staple/Fold settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
To print a document
From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed.
4-44
Box Operations
4
Under "Action", touch [Combine].
Specify the combination order. Select the two documents whose order is to be switched. The documents are combined and printed in the order specified here.
Touch [OK].
4-45
4
5
Box Operations
!
Detail
4-46
Box Operations
4.13
Overview of document transmissions

Available document transmission operations Document data saved in a user box can be sent using three different methods. The data can easily be routed simply by registering a destination with this machine instead of by sending the data through different computers.
Method E-mail PC (SMB) FTP WebDAV Description Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment. Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer. Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server. Document data is sent to the specified server on the network.
2
Note
Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent.

Transmission methods Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified using any combination of these methods.
Method Address book destination Group destinations Direct input Description Select different destinations from those registered in the address book. Multiple destinations can be registered together with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations. With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from the control panel. This is used when sending data to a destination that is not already registered. Select this method when an LDAP server is used. Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be searched for the address that corresponds to the specified conditions.
Address search
!
Detail
Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with an Address search. Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions.
4-47
4
Box Operations
Touch [OK].
4-48
Box Operations
4
2
Note
If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Description of use document screen The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to "Description of file document screen" on page 4-22. Searching for a user box name For details on searching for a user box name, refer to "Searching for a user box name" on page 4-23.
4-49
4
To send a document
Box Operations
From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent.
Under "Action", touch [Send].
Specify the destination and transmission settings.
2
Note
Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name.
4-50
Box Operations
4.14
Secure print user box

Available printing parameters Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
Available parameters Copies Print Finishing Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert Stamp/Composition Description Specify the number of copies to be printed. Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching, folding/binding or center stapling/folding. Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages. Print the document with the date/time, page number or a stamp added. Page reference p. 4-39 p. 4-39 p. 4-40
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind and Center Staple/Fold settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed. The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
To print a document (Mode 1) Follow the procedure described below when "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Mode 1".
4-51
4
2
Touch [System User Box].
Box Operations
Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then touch [OK].
Type in the password for the confidential document, and then touch [OK]. A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.
4-52
Box Operations
4
Select the document to be printed.
!
Detail
4-53
4
To print a document (Mode 2)
Box Operations
Follow the procedure described below when "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Mode 2".
Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
4-54
Box Operations
4
Type in the ID for the secured document, and then touch [OK].
A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.
Select the document to be printed and then touch [Enter Password].
6 7
Type in the password for the secured document, and then touch [OK]. Under "Action", touch [Print].
4-55
4
8
Box Operations
For a details on changing the settings, refer to "To print a document" on page 4-38.
4-56
Box Operations
4.15
Encrypted PDF user box

In order to print a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, the password specified when the document was saved must be entered.
!
Detail
Documents are saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box by using PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. For details on saving documents, refer to the manual for the corresponding software.
Printing
Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK].
A list of documents appears.
4-57
4
4
Select the document to be printed.
Box Operations
4-58
Box Operations Deleting
4
Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK].
4-59
4
4
Select the document to be deleted.
Box Operations
Under "Action", touch [Delete].
Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then touch [OK].
4-60
5
5.1

Using scan/fax programs
A set of scan settings and recipient information can be registered together as a program. This feature is convenient for frequently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions. Follow the procedure described below to register and recall a Scan/Fax program.
!
Detail
Up to 400 normal programs and 12 temporary programs, which are temporarily available, can be registered. If 412 programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary program. For details on deleting programs, refer to "Editing and deleting scan/fax programs" on page 5-10.
Recalling a scan/fax program When a Scan/Fax program is recalled, the registered settings can be checked.
Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel. The Fax/Scan mode screen appears.
Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
5-3
5
3
Touch the button for the program that is to be recalled.
To continue without checking the settings registered with the selected program, continue with step 7. To stop recalling a program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key.
Touch [Check Program Settings]. The Check Scan/Fax Program Settings screen appears.
Touch the button for the setting to be checked. To check the list of specified destinations, touch [Check Address]. The settings cannot be changed from the Check Scan/Fax Program Settings screen.
To check the scan settings for the document, such as the document quality, background adjustment and scanning area size, touch [Check Scan Settings]. There are three Check Scan Settings screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title.
5-4
Network Scanner Operations To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward
5
].
To check settings such as the document orientation and binding position, touch [Check Original Settings].
To check settings such as the e-mail subject name and message text, touch [Check E-Mail Settings].
5-5
Network Scanner Operations To check the e-mail destination for notification of the completion of jobs, touch [Check URL Notif. Destination].
6 7
After checking the settings, touch [Close]. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears again. Touch [OK].
5-6
Network Scanner Operations Registering scan/fax programs
2 3
Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
Touch the button where the program is to be saved.
Touch [Register Program]. The Register Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
5-7
5
6
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the program. The program name can contain a maximum of 24 characters.
To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
7 8
Touch [OK]. Touch [Address], and then select the destination. When selecting destinations registered in the address book, destinations can be selected from each destination type. Destinations can be specified either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by typing them in directly. Destinations that cannot be specified, such as fax destinations, are not displayed.
To directly type in the destination, select the destination type, and then type in the destination information. For a user box destination, select a previously created user box.
9
5-8
Touch [Close].
10
To send e-mail notifications of the completion of jobs, touch [Check URL Notif. Destination]. The destinations that can be specified for URL notification are FTP, SMB, WebDAV or user box destinations. This feature is not available with Scan to E-Mail operations.
11
Touch [Yes], and then specify the e-mail address for the destination of URL notifications. Recipients can be specified either by selecting destinations registered in the address book or by typing them in directly. One destination can be specified.
12 13
Touch [Close]. Touch [OK].
The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears again. The program is registered and a button with the entered program name appears.
14
Touch [OK].
5-9
5
Editing and deleting scan/fax programs
The names of registered Scan/Fax programs can be edited, or the program can be deleted.
Press the [Mode Memory] key. The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
Touch the button for the program to be edited or deleted. To check the settings of the selected program, touch [Check Program Settings]. In the Check Scan/Fax Program Settings screen, select the items to be checked. To stop editing or checking a program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key. To view a list of the pages, touch [Page List]. From the Page List screen, the name of the page can be changed.
To change the name of the selected program, touch [Register Program] and then touch [Name]. Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of the program. The program name can contain a maximum of 24 characters.
5-10
Network Scanner Operations For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
To delete the selected program, touch [Delete]. Then, touch [Yes], then [OK].
Touch [OK].
5-11
5
5.2
Scan to e-mail
Sending data in an e-mail message (Scan to e-mail)

The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send scan data to a specified e-mail address as a file attachment. Recipients can be selected from destinations registered in the address book or they can be typed in directly. The methods can be combined, for example, by selecting a recipient from a group destination, then adding other destinations through direct input. Destinations can be selected using any of the following methods. For details, refer to the corresponding section.
Selection method Selecting from the address book Entering addresses directly Selecting a group destination Selecting a destination that was searched for Searching for an LDAP server address Page reference p. 5-12 p. 5-16 p. 5-14 p. 5-17 p. 5-20
Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to "Registering an address book destination" on page 5-81.
Touch [Address Book]. The index appears if "Address Book Default" (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to "Index". If "Address Type" is selected, the index of destination types is displayed. The corresponding address appears as the name of the registered destination when an index button is touched. The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to "Selecting a destination that was searched for" on page 5-17. A list of registered destinations appears.
5-12
Touch a destination button to select the address. Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time. Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under "Broadcast Destinations".
Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. For details on the scan settings, refer to "Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)" on page 5-39.
5 6
Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass. Press the [Start] key in the control panel. Scanning of the document begins, and the data is sent.
2
Note
Do not turn off the machine until the scan job is deleted from the Job List screen.
5-13
5
Selecting a group destination
"Group" refers to multiple destinations that are registered collectively. Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a group that has been registered in advance. For details on registering group destinations, refer to "Registering a group destination" on page 5-94.
!
Detail
In order to select a group destination, "Address Book Default" (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) must be set to "Address Type" If the destination types are not displayed in the index, touch [Search], and then search for destinations in the group destination type.
Touch [Group]. The destinations registered as groups appear.
Touch the button for the group destination. A list of destinations registered in the group appears.
5-14
Select the destination where the data is to be sent, and then touch [OK]. To select all destinations, touch [Select All]. To deselect all destinations, touch [Reset]. Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under "Broadcast Destinations".
6 7
2
Note
5-15
5
Entering addresses directly
Using the control panel to directly type in the destination address when scanning is called "direct input".
Touch [E-Mail] on the Direct Input screen. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the address of the destination.
?
3
Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed? % If the "Manual Destination Input" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input tab does not appear.
Type in the address of the destination, and then touch [OK]. To specify additional destinations, repeat steps 2 and 3. Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to be recalled and used again. First, prefixes and suffixes must be registered in Administrator mode. The entered addresses appear under "Broadcast Destinations".
5-16
5 6
2
Note
Selecting a destination that was searched for Follow the procedure described below to search for the desired destination. This procedure describes an advanced search.
Parameter Index Description This button appears if "Address Book Default" (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to "Address Type". The index characters can be searched based on the character that was specified when the destination was registered. This button appears if "Address Book Default" (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to "Index". The destination types can be searched based on the type that was specified when the destination was registered. Type in the destination name or part of the address to search for the corresponding address. An LDAP search can be performed if an LDAP server is being used, for example, for user management. Search the addresses registered on the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. A basic search, where a keyword is entered, and an advanced search, where multiple conditions are used to narrow down the search, are available.
Address Type
Detail Search Address Search
!
Detail
In order to perform an Address Search, settings for the LDAP server must be specified from Administrator mode. For details on performing an Address Search, refer to "Selecting a destination with an address search" on page 5-20.
5-17
5
1 2
Touch [Detailed Search].
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Address Book] in the Fax/Scan mode screen, and then touch [Search].
Touch [Name] or [Address] to select the search to be performed.
If "Search Option Screen" was set to "ON", a screen appears, allowing the search options to be selected. Select the desired settings, and then touch [OK].
5-18
Type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [OK]. The Detailed Search screen appears again, and the search results are displayed.
Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].
5-19
5
Selecting a destination with an address search
If LDAP server settings are specified in Administrator mode, [Address Search] appears in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
!
Detail
If the if "Manual Destination Input" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Restrict", [Address Search] does not appear. The position of [Address Search] can be changed from the User Settings screen.
1 2
Touch [Address Search] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK].
Select the desired search type. Authentication may be necessary, depending on the LDAP server that is specified. When there is only one LDAP server
When there are multiple LDAP servers
5-20
Specify the search conditions. If "Basic Search" was selected, type in the keyword to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search].
If "Advanced Search" was selected, select the search condition types and type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [Start Search].
Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].
5-21
5
5.3
Scan to SMB Scan data can be sent directly to a specific computer on the network.
Sending data to a computer on the network (Scan to SMB)
In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, first specify shared file settings in Windows on the computer receiving the data. Destinations can be selected for Scan to SMB operations using any of the following methods. For details, refer to the corresponding section.
Selection method Selecting from the address book Entering addresses directly Selecting a group destination Selecting a destination that was searched for Page reference p. 5-23 p. 5-24 p. 5-14 p. 5-17
2
Reminder
When registering a destination for transmitting to a shared Windows folder, type the host name and folder name in uppercase letters.
Scan to SMB operations with Windows File Sharing (Mac OS X)/Samba (Linux/Unix) When performing Scan to SMB operations with Mac OS X, Linux or UNIX, the network settings and user names must meet the following conditions. Change the settings according to the environment used with the transmission. Machine settings Set "NTLM Settings" (displayed by touching [Network Setting] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [SMB Settings], then [Client Settings]) to "v1". Server settings The user names and shared folder names must contain 12 or less characters. When looking up destinations, the shared folder name appear only in alphanumeric characters. Subfolder names can be shown in characters other than alphanumeric characters. When looking up a destination, first type in the user ID and password.
2
Note
Samba is a program that provides SMB services for Unix or Linux. In Mac OS X, Samba is called "Windows File Sharing". CIFS is not supported.
Scan to SMB operations with Windows 98 SE and Windows Me When performing Scan to SMB operations with Windows 98 SE/Windows Me, the network settings must meet the following conditions. Machine settings Set "NTLM Settings" (displayed by touching [Network Setting] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [SMB Settings], then [Client Settings]) to "v1/v2" or "v1".
5-22
Network Scanner Operations Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to "Registering an address book destination" on page 5-81.
5-23
5
4
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. For details on the scan settings, refer to "Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)" on page 5-39.
5 6
2
Note
Entering addresses directly Using the control panel to directly type in the destination address when scanning is called "direct input". Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Host Name File Path User Name Password Reference Description Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Type the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters. Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly specify the destination folder.
Touch [PC (SMB)] on the Direct Input screen. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed? % If the "Manual Destination Input" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input tab does not appear.
5-24
Enter the information for the destination, and then touch [OK]. To check the contents of the shared folders, and then touch [Reference].
To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under "Broadcast Destinations".
5 6
2
Note
!
Detail
If the computers or workgroups on the network (subnet) that this machine belongs to is more than the numbers listed below, browsing over the network may not be performed correctly. Workgroups: 128 Computers: 128
5-25
5
5.4 Sending data to a server (Scan to FTP)
Scan to FTP
The Scan to FTP operation can be used in a network environment that contains an FTP server. The scan data can be sent to a folder specified on an FTP server on the network. This is suitable for transmitting large-sized data, such as high-resolution data. Destinations can be selected using any of the following methods. In addition, the methods can be combined, for example, by selecting a recipient from a group destination, then adding other destinations through direct input. Transmission may not be possible if the document name is too long according to the destination server conditions. Since the scanning settings are used, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name. Destinations can be selected for Scan to FTP operations using any of the following methods. For details, refer to the corresponding section.
!
Detail
If a mail server is available in the network environment, the e-mail notification function can be used to send notifications that jobs are completed. For details on the e-mail notification function, refer to "E-Mail setting" on page 5-77. If a proxy server is available in the network environment, an FTP server on the Internet can be accessed through the proxy server.
5-26
Network Scanner Operations Selecting a destination from the address book Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to "Registering an address book destination" on page 5-81.
5-27
5
4
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. For details on the scan settings, refer to "Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)" on page 5-39.
5 6
2
Note
5-28
Network Scanner Operations Entering addresses directly Using the control panel to directly type in the destination address when scanning is called "direct input". Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Host Name File Path User Name Password Description Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Specify the path to the destination folder. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK].
Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].
Detailed Settings
Parameter Port Number PASV Proxy Description Type in the port number. Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Touch [Yes] or [No]. Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Touch [Yes] or [No].
Touch [FTP] on the Direct Input screen. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
? %
Why is the Direct Input tab not displayed? If the "Manual Destination Input" (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to "Restrict", the Direct Input tab does not appear.
5-29
5
3
Type in the destination information.
To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information. The entered addresses appear under "Broadcast Destinations".
To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings.
5 6
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. For details on the scan settings, refer to "Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)" on page 5-39.
7 8
2
Note
5-30
5.5
Sending data to a server (WebDAV)

WebDAV The WebDAV operation can be used in a network environment that contains a server compatible with WebDAV. The scan data can be sent to a folder specified on the server of the network. Destinations can be selected using any of the following methods. In addition, the methods can be combined, for example, by selecting a recipient from a group destination, then adding other destinations through direct input. Transmission may not be possible if the document name is too long according to the destination server conditions. Since the document name is used during transmission, consult your network administrator when specifying the document name. Destinations can be selected for WebDAV operations using any of the following methods. For details, refer to the corresponding section.
!
Detail
If a mail server is available in the network environment, the e-mail notification function can be used to send notifications that jobs are completed. For details, refer to "URL notification setting" on page 5-78. If a proxy server is available in the network environment, a WebDAV server on the Internet can be accessed through the proxy server.
5-31
5
Selecting a destination from the address book
Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient from the already registered destinations. For details on registering destinations, refer to "Registering an address book destination" on page 5-81.
Touch [Address Book]. A list of registered destinations appears.
The index appears if "Address Book Default" (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to "Index". If "Address Type" is selected, the index of destination types is displayed. The corresponding address appears as the name of the registered destination when an index button is touched.
Touch a destination button to select the address. The button appears selected, and the destination appears under "Broadcast Destinations". Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time.
Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address.
5-32
5 6
2
Note
5-33
5
Entering addresses directly
Using the control panel to directly type in the destination address when scanning is called "direct input". Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Host Name File Path User Name Password Description Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Specify the path to the destination folder. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK]. Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK]. Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].
Detailed Settings
Parameter Port Number Proxy SSL Setting Description Type in the port number. Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Select whether or not SSL is used with transmissions.
Touch [WebDAV] on the Direct Input tab. A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
5-34
Type in the destination information.
The entered addresses appear under "Broadcast Destinations". To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the information.
To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then specify the settings.
5 6
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings], and then specify the desired scan settings. For details on the scan settings, refer to "Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)" on page 5-39.
7 8
2
Note
5-35
5
5.6 Using Web Service
The scan command can be sent from a computer (Windows Vista) on the network, or this machine can scan using the specified operation and the scan data can be sent to the computer. Two methods are available for scanning with Web Service: the scanning method can be selected from the control panel of the machine and the scan data sent to the computer, or the scan command can be sent from the computer. Specifying the scan command from the control panel of the machine The scan data will be sent to a previously registered network computer.
Touch [Web Service] on the Direct Input tab. Network computers where this machine is registered as a Web Service scanner appear as destinations.
Select the desired destination, and then touch [Start].
Scanning of the document begins, and the data is sent to the computer.
5-36
Network Scanner Operations Checking the Web Service destinations % Select a destination, and then touch [Details] to display the destination details.
Searching for a Web Service destination A destination can be searched for by typing in a keyword that is contained in the destination name.
Touch [Search] on the Web Service screen.
Type in the keyword to be searched for, and then touch [OK] to search for corresponding destinations.
5-37
5
Giving a scan command from a computer
If the machine driver is installed on a computer on the network, it is possible to give a scan command from the computer to the machine and receive scanned data. This section describes the procedure for scanning from the Windows photo gallery for example.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Start application software capable of scanning. Select [Import from Camera or Scanner] from the "File" menu. Select this machine from the list of "Scanners and Cameras", and then click the [Import] button. The New Scan screen starts. Place the original in the machine. Specify the scanning settings, and then click the [Scan] button. Enter a file name in the "Tag these pictures (optional)" field, and then click the [Import] button. Now scanning is performed and scanned data are added to the list of images.
5-38
5.7
Specifying scan and transmission settings (Scan settings/original settings/communication settings)

Settings that can be specified In the Fax/Scan mode screen, touch [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] or [Communication Settings] to specify detailed settings for scanning and sending. Settings can be specified for the following.
Scan Settings
Parameter Original Type Simplex/Duplex Resolution File Type Density Separate Scan Description Select the quality of the document to be scanned. Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned. Select the resolution for scanning. Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. Select the density for scanning. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF or when placing the document on the original glass. Adjust the image quality, such as the background, color and sharpness. Specify settings for the "Erase" function. Set the "Book Scanning" function. Specify settings for the scan size, filing numbers, etc. Specify the name that the document is saved with. Page reference p. 5-41 p. 5-43 p. 5-44 p. 5-45 p. 5-48 p. 5-49
Quality Adjustment Erase Book Scan Application Document Name
p. 5-49 p. 5-53 p. 5-54 p. 5-58 p. 5-73
5-39
5
Original Settings
Parameter Mixed Original Z-Folded Original Long Original Original Direction Binding Position Despeckle Description
Page reference p. 5-75 p. 5-75 p. 5-75 p. 5-75 p. 5-75 p. 5-75
Select this setting when loading a document containing different page sizes. Select this setting when loading a zigzag-folded document. Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. Select the orientation of the loaded document. Select the binding position for the document. Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF.
Communication Settings
Parameter E-Mail Setting URL Notification Setting E-Mail Encryption Description Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages. Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent. This parameter appears when "S/MIME Communication Settings" is set to "ON". Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent. This parameter appears when "S/MIME Communication Settings" is set to "ON". Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent. Page reference p. 5-77 p. 5-78 p. 5-79
Digital Signature
p. 5-79
!
Detail
The "Digital Signature" parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings.
5-40
Network Scanner Operations Original type From the following five image quality settings, select the appropriate setting according to the type of document being scanned.
Setting Text Text/Photo Photo Dot Matrix Original Copied Paper Description Select this setting for documents consisting only of text. Select this setting for documents consisting of both text and photos (halftones). Select this setting for documents consisting of only photos (halftones). Select this setting for documents consisting of text that generally appears faint. Select this setting for documents with an even density produced using a copier or printer.
If "Text/Photo" or "Photo" is selected, the photo type can also be selected.

Setting Photo Paper Printed Photo Description Select this setting for photos printed on photo paper. Select this setting for printed photos, such as in books or magazines.
5-41
5
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Original Type].
Touch the button for the image quality.
If "Text/Photo"or "Photo" is selected, select the photo type, and then touch [OK].
5-42
Network Scanner Operations Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned.
Setting 1-Sided 2-Sided Cover + 2-Sided Description Select this setting to scan a single-sided document. Select this setting to scan a double-sided document. Select this setting to scan the first page of the document as a single-sided cover page, then scan the remaining pages as double-sided.
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Simplex/Duplex].
Select the scanning type.
5-43
5
Resolution Select the resolution for scanning.
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Resolution].
Select the resolution.
5-44
Network Scanner Operations File type Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following four file formats are available. File Type
Setting PDF Compact PDF TIFF JPEG XPS Description Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. Select this setting to save the data in a highly compressed PDF format. Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format.
Some File Type settings may not be available, depending on the selected Color setting. The possible combinations of the File Type and Color settings are shown below.
Auto Color PDF Compact PDF TIFF JPEG XPS o o o o o Full Color o o o o o Grayscale o o o o o Black o e o e o
o: Available e: Not available If the "PDF" or "Compact PDF" File Type setting is selected, the encryption level and stamp combination method can be specified. Encryption settings
Parameter Encryption Level Password Document Permissions Description Select the encryption level. Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again. Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password again.
Detail Setting of Encryption If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed permission settings can be specified.
Setting Printing Allowed Enable copying of text, images and other content Change Allowed Description Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If "Encryption Level" is set to "High level", "Low Resolution" appears. Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted. Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data.
5-45
5
Stamp Composition
Setting Image Text Description Select this setting to insert the text as an image. Select this setting to insert the text as text.
2
Note
The date/time, page number and header/footer can be combined as text. Stamps are combined as images.
In addition, the grouping of the saved data can be specified. Scan Setting
Setting Single Page Multi Page Description Select this setting to create a single file for each page of the document. Select this setting to create a single file from the entire scanned document. This setting cannot be selected if the "JPEG" File Type setting is selected.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the Color setting, refer to "Color (Quality adjustment)" on page 5-49.
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [File Type].
Select the file format.
5-46
If "PDF" or "Compact PDF" was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary.
Specify the encryption settings.
6 7
To specify the stamp combination method, touch [Stamp Composition]. Select the desired stamp composition.
8 9 10
Touch [OK]. Select the scan setting. Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
5-47
5
Density Adjust the density for scanning.
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Density].
Select the density. To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. To select the default setting, touch [Standard].
5-48
Network Scanner Operations Separate scan
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for various types of documents, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, when placing the document on the original glass, or when single-sided documents are combined with double-sided documents. % Touch [Separate Scan] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. The setting is selected when the button appears selected.
Color (Quality adjustment) Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. The following four settings are available.
Setting Auto Color Full Color Grayscale Black Description Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. Select this setting to scan in full color. Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.
Some Color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File Type setting. The possible combinations of the Color and File Type settings are shown below.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the File Type setting, refer to "File type" on page 5-45.
Auto PDF Compact PDF TIFF JPEG XPS o o o o o
Full Color o o o o o
Grayscale o o o o o
Black o e o e o
o: Available e: Not available
5-49
5
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Quality Adjustment].
Select the color type.
5-50
Network Scanner Operations Background removal (Quality adjustment)
The scanning density of the document background can be adjusted. When documents printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted.
1 2
Touch [Background Removal].
Adjust the density of the background. To adjust the density automatically, touch [Auto]. To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark]. To select the default setting, touch [Standard].
5-51
5
Sharpness (Quality adjustment) Contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized when scanning.
1 2
Touch [Sharpness].
Adjust the sharpness.
5-52
Network Scanner Operations Frame erase (Erase)
An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width of 0.1 to 50 mm can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom.
2
Note
If a width to be erased around the document is specified with "Frame Erase" with the "Book Scanning" function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen).
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Erase].
Touch [Frame Erase].
5-53
5
4
Select the width of the area to be erased.
To use frame erasing, touch [Yes]. To erase the same width on all sides, touch [Frame], and then specify a value. To specify different widths for the top, left, right and bottom, touch the button for the desired location, and then specify a value. To cancel frame erasing, touch [None].)
5
%
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
Book copy (Book scan) Select the method for scanning page spreads. The following four scanning methods are available. In addition, the binding position and erase settings can be specified.
Description Select this setting to scan a page spread as a single page. Select this setting to scan a page spread as two separate pages (left and right). Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover. Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover, the second page as the back cover, and the remaining pages as the body.
Setting Book Spread Separation Front Cover Front + Back Covers
The document can be scanned while erasing the shadows typical for page spreads.
Parameter Frame Erase Description An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 0.1 and 50 mm can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top and bottom. An area along the center of the document can be erased. Areas with a width between 0.1 and 30 mm can be specified.
Center Erase
2
Note
Specify the size of the page spread as the scan size. If a width to be erased around the document is specified with "Frame Erase" with the "Book Copy" function, the same settings are also applied on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen).
5-54
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Book Scan].
Touch [Book Copy].
Specify the settings for the "Book Copy" function.
5-55
Network Scanner Operations If "Separation", "Front + Back Covers" or "Front Cover" was selected, touch [Binding Position], and then select the binding position.
Scan size (Application) Select the size of paper that is to be scanned. The following Scan Size settings are available.
Setting Auto Standard sizes Custom Size Description Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded document. When the "Mixed Original" setting is not selected. Select a preset paper size (such as letter or 11 e 17 (A4 or B5)) and orientation. Type in the dimensions of a custom size that is not available as a preset size. The size in the X direction can be set between 30 and 432 mm, and the size in the Y direction can be set between 30 and 297 mm. 9 e 13 and 13 e 18 mm sizes can be selected.
Photo Size
2
Note
If the "Book Scanning" function was set, specify the size of the page spread.
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Application].
5-56
Touch [Scan Size].
Select the size and orientation.
Select the orientation and size of the paper to be scanned. Touching [Custom Size] displays the Custom Size screen. Use the keypad to type in the size, and then touch [OK]. The values can be specified in 0.1 mm increments.
5-57
Network Scanner Operations Touching [Photo Size] displays the Photo Size screen. Select the orientation and size of the photo to be scanned, and then touch [OK].
Annotation (Application) Previously specified text, numbers or the date/time can be added to a document when it is scanned and saved in a user box. Date/Time (Application) The scanning date and time can be added to all pages of a document. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Date Format Time Format Pages Text Color Text Size Print Position Description Select the format for the date. Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format. Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or 1st page only). Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Select the size (minimal or std.) in which text is printed. Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.
1 2
5-58
Touch [Stamp/Composition].
Touch [Date/Time].
To specify a date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time settings.
5-59
Network Scanner Operations Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size. Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK]. To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 0.1 and 50 mm in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.
5-60
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear.
Page number (Application) Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Starting Page Number Starting Chapter Number Page Number Type Text Color Text Size Print Position Description Specify the starting page number. Specify the starting chapter number. Select the format for the page number. Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Select the size (minimal std.) in which text is printed. Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.
1 2
5-61
5
3
Touch [Page Number].
To specify the page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number settings.
5-62
Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK].
5-63
Network Scanner Operations To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 0.1 and 50 mm in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.
Stamp (Application) Preset text, such as "URGENT", can be added to all pages of a document.
2
Note
If "File Type" is set to "PDF" or "Compact PDF", the stamps are added as images. They cannot be added as text.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Stamp Type/Preset Stamps Pages Text Color Text Size Print Position Description Select a stamp, such as "URGENT", "PLEASE REPLY" or "DO NOT COPY". Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or 1st page only). Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Select the size (minimal or std.) in which text is printed. Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.
5-64
1 2
Touch [Stamp].
5-65
5
5
To specify a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings.
Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color. Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the settings, touch [OK].
5-66
Network Scanner Operations To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position]. The position can be adjusted between 0.1 and 50 mm in the left/right direction and the up/down direction.
Header/Footer (Application) Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode.
!
Detail
Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the information can be checked or changed when scanning. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Header Settings
Description Select whether or not to insert a header. If a header is to be inserted, specify whether to insert text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Select whether or not to insert a footer. If a footer is to be inserted, specify whether to insert text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number). Select the pages where the header/footer is to be inserted (either all pages or 1st page only). Select the text color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta). Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed.
Footer Settings
Pages Text Color Text Size
5-67
5
1 2
Touch [Header/Footer].
5-68
To print a header/footer, touch [YES], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled.
To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/Change Temporarily]. The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears.
Touch "Header Settings" or "Footer Settings", and then specify the header/footer settings.
5-69
5
Text
Date/Time
Other
5-70
Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and the text size. Text Color
Text Size
To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset].
9 10
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
5-71
5
Send & Print (Application)
Settings can be specified to print while scanning. Various print settings can be specified. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Copies Simplex/Duplex Staple Description Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number between 1 and 9999 can be specified. Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed. Select whether or not the prints will be stapled. If they will be stapled, select the number of staples and the position.
1 2
Touch [Send & Print].
To print while scanning, touch [Yes], and then specify the desired settings.
5-72
To select the staple position, touch [Corner] or [2 Positions], and then touch [Position Setting].
Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK].
Document name Specify the name of the scan data. If no document name is specified, the name is automatically set based on the following information. As an example, the name "SKMBT_C55008102315230" is described below.
Section S Description This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved. C: Copy S: Fax/Scan P: Print
2
Note
"S" appears for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box screen.
KMBT_C550 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The factory default is "KMBT_C550" ("KMBT_C451" on bizhub C451, "KMBT_C650" on bizhub C650). This name can be changed with the "Input Machine Address" parameter on the Administrator/Machine Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters can be specified. This indicates the year (first two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if the document is part of a series of scans. This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear in the screen for the document name; however, it is added automatically as part of the name when the document is routed. Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the server receiving the files, for example, when data is sent by FTP. This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters do not appear in the screen for the document name; however, they are added automatically as part of the name when the document is routed.
08102315230 _0001
.(file_extension)
5-73
5
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [Document Name].
Using the keyboard that appeared in the touch panel, type in the document name. The document name can contain a maximum of 30 characters. To stop registering the document name, press the [Reset] key. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
Touch [OK].
5-74
Network Scanner Operations Original settings Specify the type of document that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed page sizes or is folded in a zigzag.
Parameter Mixed Original Description
Select this setting when documents of different sizes are loaded into the ADF (optional). The scan speed is decreased since the size of each page is detected before it is scanned. Select this setting to detect the size of a zigzag-folded document by the length fed through the ADF. Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard size. Select the orientation of the document. After the document is scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented. Select the binding position, such as when holes are punched in the document or the document is stapled. In addition, specify the binding position when a double-sided document is loaded. This adjusts the scan of double-sided documents so that the binding position is not reversed. Left Select this setting for a document with binding on the left side. Top Select this setting for a document with binding at the top. Auto The binding is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm. Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF.
Z-Folded Original Long Original Original Direction Binding Position
Despeckle
2
Note
These functions can be used together.
1 2
Touch [Original Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Select settings for the Original Settings functions.
5-75
Network Scanner Operations Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK].
Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the binding position, and then touch [OK].
To apply the "Despeckle" setting, touch [Despeckle] to select it.
!
Detail
The scanning speed will be reduced if the "Despeckle" setting is selected. Clean the left partition glass when it becomes extremely dirty.
5-76
Network Scanner Operations E-Mail setting When data is sent, an e-mail message containing the document name can be sent to the specified e-mail address.
!
Detail
The information specified as the document name is used with Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB and Scan to WebDAV operations. If "Change the "From" Address" (displayed by touching [System Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Restrict User Access], then [Restrict Operation]) is set to "Restrict", the From address cannot be entered directly.
Parameter Document Name
Description The name of the file to be saved is displayed. The document name specified later appears as the document name, even if the document name was specified with "Document Name" on the Scan Settings screen. If no document name is specified, the name automatically specified based on the settings in the Administrator Settings screen is displayed. A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. The text specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 64 characters can be entered. The e-mail address specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. The text specified from Utility mode is displayed. Touch [Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 256 characters can be entered.
Subject From Body
1 2
Touch [Communication Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [E-Mail Settings].
Specify the e-mail transmission settings.
Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
5-77
5
URL notification setting
Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are to be sent.
!
Detail
The destinations that can be specified for "URL Notification Setting" include FTP servers, SMB server, WebDAV servers or user boxes. This feature does not function during e-mail transmissions, even if a setting is specified.
1 2
Touch [Communication Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [URL Notification Setting].
Specify the e-mail address where notifications will be sent. Select a registered e-mail address. Touch [Direct Input], and then specify the e-mail address for the destination of URL notifications.
5-78
Network Scanner Operations E-Mail encryption
A setting can be specified for this parameter when "S/MIME Communication Settings" is set to "ON". Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent.
1 2
Touch [Communication Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. Touch [E-Mail Encryption].
Digital signature This parameter appears when "S/MIME Communication Settings" is set to "ON". Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are sent.
2
Note
This parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings.
1 2
Touch [Communication Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen. To add a digital signature, touch [Digital Signature].
5-79
5
5.8 Settings that can be specified from utility mode
Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for scanning functions and the screens. Utility mode parameters The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual.
Parameter One-Touch Destionation/User Box Registration Description Specify settings for scan destinations. Destinations can be registered as programs, groups or in the address book. For details, refer to "Registering an address book destination" on page 5-81 and"Registering a group destination" on page 5-94. Specify default settings for the Fax/Scan mode screen and settings for saving data. Register header/footer settings. The registered destinations, titles and text can be printed as lists. Specify the basic settings in order to use the machine on the network. Specify the necessary system connection settings.
User Settings Administrator Settings
Other related parameters Setting procedures are not provided in this manual; however, some parameters manage the scanning functions and network connection.
Parameter Administrator Registration User Authentication Settings Description If the e-mail address of the administrator is not specified, scan data cannot be sent by e-mail. If "User Registration" is set so that scan operations are not permitted, scan operations cannot be performed.
PageScope Web Connection PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection. Specifying settings with the utility is convenient since text can easily be typed in from your computer instead of with the machines control panel.
5-80
5.9
Registering an address book destination

A maximum of 2,000 destinations can be registered. E-Mail destination Settings can be specified for the following for the e-mail destination to be registered.
Parameter No. Description Type in the registration number (between 1 and 2000) for the address book destination. When the screen appears, the displayed number is the lowest available number. Type in a name of 24 characters or less for the registered destination. Select the index characters. For frequently used destinations, touch [Favorites] so that the destination can be found more easily. Type in the address where the e-mail is sent.
Name Index E-Mail Address
!
Detail
If "Registering and Changing Address" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", specify these settings with "One-Touch/User Box Registration" on the Administrator Settings screen.
1 2
Touch [1 Create One-Touch Destination (Address Book)] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. Touch [1 E-Mail]. The E-Mail screen appears.
Touch [New]. The New screen appears.
To specify the registration number, touch [No.], and then use the keypad to type in the number.
5-81
5
5 6 7
For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Name], and then type in the registration name, using the keyboard that appears.
Touch [OK]. Touch [Index], and then select the index characters.
8 9 10
Touch [OK]. Touch [E-Mail Address], and then type in the e-mail address, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The e-mail destination is registered.
!
Detail
To check a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. To change the settings for a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Edit]. The registration number cannot be changed in the Edit screen. To delete a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Delete].
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name" and "E-Mail Address". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
5-82
Network Scanner Operations User box Settings can be specified for the following for the user box destination to be registered.
Parameter No. Description
Type in the registration number (between 1 and 2000) for the address book destination. When the screen appears, the displayed number is the lowest available number. Type in a name of 24 characters or less for the registered destination. Select the index characters. For frequently used destinations, touch [Favorites] so that the destination can be found more easily. Select one user box where data is to be saved.
Name Index User Box
!
Detail
In order to register a user box as a destination, the user box must be registered first.
1 2
Touch [1 Create One-Touch Destination (Address Book)] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. Touch [2 User Box]. The User Box screen appears.
4 5 6
To specify the registration number, touch [No.], and then use the keypad to type in the number. Touch [Name], and then type in the registration name, using the keyboard that appears. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
Touch [OK].
5-83
5
7
Touch [Index], and then select the index characters.
8 9 10
Touch [OK]. Touch [User Box], and then select a user box. Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The user box destination is registered.
!
Detail
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name" and "User Box". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
PC (SMB) Settings can be specified for the following for the SMB destination to be registered.
Parameter No. Description Type in the registration number (between 1 and 2000) for the address book destination. When the screen appears, the displayed number is the lowest available number. Type in a name of 24 characters or less for the registered destination. Select the index characters. For frequently used destinations, touch [Favorites] so that the destination can be found more easily. Type in 127 characters or less for the user ID for logging onto the destination computer. Type in 14 characters or less for the password for logging onto the destination computer. Type in the host address for the destination computer in the format of a host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address. For a host name, type in 255 characters or less. Type in 255 characters or less for the path to the saved file. Check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This can be used to directly check the destination folder.
Name Index User ID Password Host Address
File Path Reference
5-84
1 2
Touch [1 Create One-Touch Destination (Address Book)] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. Touch [4 PC (SMB)]. The PC (SMB) screen appears.
Touch [New]. New screen 1/2 appears.
4 5 6 7
Touch [OK].
5-85
5
9 10 11 12 13
Touch [OK].
Network Scanner Operations Touch [User ID], and then type in the user ID, using the keyboard that appears.
Touch [Password], and then type in the password, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK]. Touch or .
New screen 2/2 appears.
14
Touch [Host Address], and then type in the IP address or host name. To enter a host name, touch [Host Name Input], and then type in the host name, using the keyboard that appears. To enter an IP address, touch [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and then type in the address, using the keypad or the number buttons that appear. Touch or to move the cursor to the desired position, and then type in the numbers. When the input format is switched to entering an IP address after the host name was entered, the host name is cleared. If [Host Name Input] is touched after the IP address was entered, the entered IP address is saved and the input screen appears. Type the host name and file path in uppercase letters.
15 16 17
Touch [OK]. Touch [File Path], and then type in the file path, using the keyboard that appears. To check the contents of the shared folders, touch [Reference].
Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. The SMB destination is registered.
!
Detail
To check a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. To change the settings for a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Edit]. The registration number cannot be changed in the Edit screen. To delete a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Delete]. If the computers or workgroups on the network (subnet) that this machine belongs to is more than the numbers listed below, browsing over the network may not be performed correctly. Workgroups: 128 Computers: 128
5-86
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name", "Host Address" and "File Path". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
5-87
5
FTP
Settings can be specified for the following for the FTP destination to be registered.
Parameter No. Name Index Host Address File Path User ID Password anonymous PASV Proxy Port Number Description Type in the registration number (between 1 and 2000) for the address book destination. When the screen appears, the displayed number is the lowest available number. Type in a name of 24 characters or less for the registered destination. Select the index characters. For frequently used destinations, touch [Favorites] so that the destination can be found more easily. Type in the host address in the format of a host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address. For a host name, type in 63 characters or less. Type in 96 characters or less for the path to the saved file. Type in 47 characters or less for the user ID for logging onto the host computer. Type in 31 characters or less for the password for logging onto the host computer. To specify no user ID for logging onto the host computer, touch [ON]. Select whether or not the PASV mode is used. Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535)
1 2
Touch [1 Create One-Touch Destination (Address Book)] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. Touch [5 FTP]. The FTP screen appears.
To specify the registration number, touch [No.], and then use the keypad to type in the number.
5-88
5 6 7
Touch [Name], and then type in the registration name, using the keyboard that appears. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
8 9
Touch [OK]. Touch [Host Address], and then type in the IP address or host name. To enter a host name, touch [Host Name Input], and then type in the host name, using the keyboard that appears. To enter an IP address, touch [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and then type in the address, using the keypad or the number buttons that appear. Touch or to move the cursor to the desired position, and then type in the numbers. When the input format is switched to entering an IP address after the host name was entered, the host name is cleared. If [Host Name Input] is touched after the IP address was entered, the entered IP address is saved and the input screen appears. When [Host Name Input] is touched, check that the DNS setting is correctly specified.
10 11 12 13
Touch [OK]. Touch [File Path], and then type in the file path, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK]. Touch or .
14 15
Touch [User ID], and then type in the user ID, using the keyboard that appears. To cancel registration of the user ID, touch [ON] beside "anonymous".
Touch [OK].
5-89
5
16 17 18
Touch [OK].
Network Scanner Operations Touch [Password], and then type in the password, using the keyboard that appears.
If necessary, specify settings for "anonymous", "PASV mode", "Proxy" and "Port Number". To enter a port number, press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current value, and then use the keypad to type in the port number. If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range.
19
Touch [OK]. The FTP destination is registered.
!
Detail
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name", "Host Address", "File Path", "User ID" and "Password". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
5-90
Network Scanner Operations WebDAV Settings can be specified for the following for the FTP destination to be registered.
Parameter No. Name Index User ID Password Host Address File Path Proxy SSL Settings Port Number Description Type in the registration number (between 1 and 2000) for the address book destination. When the screen appears, the displayed number is the lowest available number. Type in a name of 24 characters or less for the registered destination.
Select the index characters. For frequently used destinations, touch [Favorites] so that the destination can be found more easily. Type in 47 characters or less for the user ID for logging onto the host computer. Type in 31 characters or less for the password for logging onto the host computer. Type in the host address in the format of a host name, IPv4 address or IPv6 address. For a host name, type in 63 characters or less. Type in 96 characters or less for the path to the saved file. Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Select whether or hot SSL is Used. Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535)
1 2
Touch [1 Create One-Touch Destination (Address Book)] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. Touch [6 WebDAV]. The WebDAV screen appears.
4 5
5-91
5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
Touch [OK]. Touch [User ID], and then type in the user ID, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK]. Touch [Password], and then type in the password, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK]. Touch or .
14
Touch [Host Address], and then type in the IP address or host name. To enter a host name, touch [Host Name Input], and then type in the host name, using the keyboard that appears. To enter an IP address, touch [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input], and then type in the address, using the keypad or the number buttons that appear. Touch or to move the cursor to the desired position, and then type in the numbers. When the input format is switched to entering an IP address after the host name was entered, the host name is cleared. If [Host Name Input] is touched after the IP address was entered, the entered IP address is saved and the input screen appears. When [Host Name Input] is touched, check that the DNS setting is correctly specified.
15 16 17
Touch [OK]. Touch [File Path], and then type in the file path, using the keyboard that appears. Touch [OK].
5-92
5
or .
18
Touch
19
If necessary, specify settings for "Proxy", "SSL Settings" and "Port Number". To enter a port number, press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current value, and then use the keypad to type in the port number. If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message Input error appears. Type a value within the allowable range.
20
Touch [OK]. The WebDAV destination is registered.
!
Detail
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name", "Host Address", "File Path", "User ID "and "Password". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
5-93
5
5.10 Registering a group destination
A group destination can be registered.
!
Detail
Up to 100 groups can be registered, and up to 500 destinations can be registered in a single group.
Touch [2 Create Group] in the Create One-Touch Destination screen. The Group screen appears.
3 4 5
Touch [Name], and then type in the registration name, using the keyboard that appears. For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 9-3.
Touch [OK]. Touch [Select Group].
5-94
Select a destination type, and then select the destination to be registered.
7 8 9
Touch [OK]. Touch [Close]. Touch [OK]. The Group destination is registered.
!
Detail
To check a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Check Job Set.]. To change the settings for a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Edit]. To delete a registered destination, select it, and then touch [Delete].
2
Note
The registration cannot be completed if no settings are specified for "Name" and "Destination". To cancel the registration, touch [Cancel]. To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
5-95
5-96

The User mode provides functions for checking and operating the machine on a user level. You can select from five tabs (Information, Job, Box, Direct Print, and Store Address). This section contains descriptions of the items in the menu that appears on the left side of the page when each User mode tab is clicked.
6.1
Information tab
On the Information tab, information and settings concerning the system configuration of the machine are displayed. Device Information - Configuration Summary The system configuration and status of the machine are displayed. This is the first page that appears when the machine is accessed with PageScope Web Connection.
Item Device Information Paper Tray Output Tray Administrator Information Unavailable Information
Description Displays device information and the toner status. Displays the name of each installed paper tray, the size and type of the loaded paper, the remaining paper quantities and the paper capacities. Displays the name of each installed output tray. Displays the administrator information. Displays the information for paper trays and functions that cannot be used.
!
Detail
If "HTML" was selected as the display format during logon, select a paper tray under "Paper Tray", and then click the [Detail] button to view detailed information. For details on displaying information about unavailable features, contact your technical representative.
6-3
6
Device Information - Option
The size of the machines memory, the hard disk status, and the installation status of options can be displayed.
Item RAM, HDD, Network
Description Displays information on the memory, hard disk drive and network.
The installed options are displayed.
6-4
PageScope Web Connection Operations Device Information - Consumables Information about consumables for the machine is displayed.
Item Toner (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black) Imaging Unit (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black) Waste Toner Box Ozone Filter Hole-Punch Scrap Box Staple Cartrige (1,2) Saddle Staple Cartrige (1, 2) Fusing Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Transfer Roller Unit Color Toner Filter
Description Displays information for each of the items.
2
Note
The information that is displayed differs depending on the options that are installed.
6-5
6
Device Information - Meter Count Counters managed by the machine can be displayed.
Item Total Counter Copy Counter Print Counter Scan Counter (appears as Scan/Fax Counter if the optional fax kit has been installed) Total (Copy + Print)
Description Displays totals for the output counters (Copy, Print, Scan/Fax). Displays the various counters.
Displays the counters for the Color settings.
6-6
PageScope Web Connection Operations Online Assistance Support information for the machine can be displayed.
Item Product Name Contact Name Contact Information Product Help URL Corporate URL Supplies and Accessories Online Help URL Driver URL
Description Displays the product name. Displays the information entered on the page that appeared after clicking "Online Assistance" in the menu on the Maintenance tab in Administrator mode.
Change User Password The password for the user who is logged on can be changed.
Item User Name Current Password New Password Retype New Password
Description Displays the name of user who is logged on. Type in the current password. Type in the new password (up to 64 characters, excluding " and +). Type in the new password again for confirmation.
6-7
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have specified on the machine, "Change User Password" appears in the menu. The user password can be changed when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)". This menu item does not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled.
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", only a password containing 8 digits can be specified. If a user password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "Enable".
6-8
PageScope Web Connection Operations Function Permission Information Information on operations permitted by users and accounts can be displayed.
Item Function Permission* Output Permission (Print/TX) Upper Limit Management *
Description Displays whether or not each machine operation can be used. Displays whether or not each machine output operation can be used. Displays the maximum limits and current counter values. "Meter Count" does not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled.
This is only displayed in user registration information.
!
Detail
If user authentication and account track settings have been specified on the machine, "Function Permission Information" appears in the menu. If user authentication or account track settings have not been specified, only the specified function permissions are displayed.
6-9
6
Network Setting Information Network settings for the machine can be displayed.
Item Protocol Information Network Information
Description Displays the usage status for each protocol. Displays information about the network.
6-10
PageScope Web Connection Operations Print Setting Information
Settings for the printer controller of the machine can be displayed. A print job sent with no settings specified is printed with these settings.
The following information can be selected from the submenu.

Item Default Setting Font Information Macro List ICC Profile List PCL Setting PS Setting XPS Settings Description Displays information for each of the items.
6-11
6
Print Information Font and settings information can be printed. %
Select the report to be printed, select a paper tray from the "Paper Tray" list, and then click the [OK] button.
Item PS Font List PCL Font List GDI Demo Page Configuration Page Paper Tray
Description Prints the list of fonts that can be used with PostScript. Prints the list of fonts that can be used with PCL. Prints the GDI demo page. Prints the list of print settings specified for the machine. Select the paper tray loaded with the paper used for printing the reports.
2
Note
It may not be possible to print reports while the machine is processing a job.
6-12
6.2
Job tab
On the Job tab, the jobs managed by the machine are displayed. The display of the Job tab differs depending on the display format selected during logon. Current Jobs The jobs being performed and the jobs queued to be performed can be viewed. % Select a job type, and then click the [Go] button.
Select from the following job types.

Item Print TX RX* Save * Description Displays a list of print jobs and their details. Displays a list of transmission jobs and their details. Displays a list of fax reception jobs and their details. Displays a list of user box jobs and their details.
Appears if fax operations are available.
Sample page of print jobs
The number assigned to the job when it was queued in the machine appears as the job number. To output a job sooner, select the job, and then click the [Increase Priority] button (with print jobs). The output priority setting is not available if an administrator is logged on. To view the list of destinations, select the job, and then click the [Display Broadcast Destinations] button (with transmission jobs). To delete a job, select the job, and then click the [Delete] button.
!
Detail
If "HTML" was selected as the display format during logon, the page to be displayed can be selected. If an administrator or user box administrator is logged on, jobs of registered users can be deleted.
6-13
6
Job History The completed jobs can be viewed.
1 2
Item Print TX RX*
Select a job type, and then click the [Go] button. Select from the following job types.
Description Displays a list of print jobs and their details. Displays a list of transmission jobs and their details. Displays a list of fax reception jobs and their details. Displays a list of user box jobs and their details.
Save *
Sample page of print jobs
The number assigned to the job when it was queued in the machine appears as the job number.
!
Detail
If "HTML" was selected as the display format during logon, the page to be displayed can be selected. If "HTML" was selected as the display format during logon, select a job, and then click the [Detail] button to view detailed information.
6-14
PageScope Web Connection Operations Communication List The completed transmission and reception jobs can be viewed.
1 2
Item
Select a job type, and then click the [Go] button. Select from the following job types.
Description Displays a list of scan transmission (e-mail, FTP and SMB) jobs and their details. Displays a list of fax transmission jobs and their details. Displays a list of fax reception jobs and their details.
Scan to E-mail Fax TX* Fax RX* *
Sample page when "Scan to E-mail" is selected
!
Detail
If "HTML" was selected as the display format during logon, select a job, and then click the [Detail] button to view detailed information.
6-15
6
6.3 Box tab
From the Box tab, user boxes can be created, and documents in user boxes can be viewed and downloaded.
2
Note
If an administrator or user box administrator is logged on, the settings for user boxes can be changed or the user boxes can be deleted without the box password being entered.
Open User Box A list of all currently created user boxes (public user boxes, personal user boxes and group user boxes) can be displayed, and the user box to be opened can be specified.
Open User Box (Public/Group/Personal)

Item User Box Number User Box Password Description Type in the number of the user box to be opened. Type in the password if one has been specified for the user box.
User Box List

Item Search from Index Page (Display by 50 cases) User Box List Description Displays the list of user boxes according the index search characters selected when the box was created. If there are more than 50 user boxes, specify the page to be displayed. Displays the user box number, user box name, user box type and date/time that the box was created. appears beside user boxes where a password has been specified.
From the User Box List, click the name of the desired user box. Otherwise, type in the user box number and password, and then click the [OK] button. Basic user box information and the list of documents saved in the user box are displayed.
2
Reminder
If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" in Administrator mode is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect user box password the specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
6-16
!
Detail
When the name of a user box is clicked, a page for entering the password appears if a password has been specified for the box.
Item [User Box Setting] button [Delete User Box] button Thumbnail View Specify operation [Changes the display] button Select Thumbnail Document Name [Edit Name] button [Cancel] button
Description Click this button to change the user box settings. For details, refer to "Changing user box settings" on page 6-21. Click this button to display a page to delete the user box. Select whether or not thumbnails are displayed in the list of documents. Select the operation to be performed with the document. For details, refer to "Document operations" on page 6-18. Click this button to display the "Select" check box beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. A check box appears beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed. A thumbnail is displayed if the thumbnail view is turned on. Displays the name of the document. Click the name to display details about the document. Click this button to change the document name. Click this button to return to the User Box List page
2
Note
If an administrator is logged on, the File List is not displayed.
6-17
6
Document operations Select from the following document operations. Display All Print Send to other device Download to PC Move/Copy Delete
!
Detail
"Send to other device" and "Download to PC" can be used with documents saved in Fax/Scan mode. Some operations and documents may not be available, depending on the function limitation and output permission settings specified for the account or user who is logged on.
Select the operation from the "Specify operation" list, and then click the [Changes the display] button.
A check box appears beside all documents with which the selected operation can be performed.
Select the check box beside the documents with which the operation is to be performed, and then click the settings button.
The corresponding settings page appears.
6-18
Specify the desired settings, and then click the [OK] button. When the [Print Setting] button is clicked
Click the [Cancel] button to return to the File List page.
Settings available with the [Print Setting] button

Item Combine Description This setting appears if multiple documents were selected. To print multiple documents together, select this check box. This setting is not available if 11 or more documents are selected. Type in the number of copies to be printed. (Range: 1 to 9999) Select whether or not double-sided printing is performed. If "Group" or "Sort" is selected, the "Offset" check box is available. If multiple documents were selected, "Group" and "Sort" is not available. This appears if multiple documents were selected. Select a document, and then click the [Top], [Up], [Down] or [Bottom] button to change the document order. To return the documents to their original order, click the [Undo] button. To display the documents as thumbnails, click the [Thumbnail View] button.
Number of Sets 2-Sided Print Finishing Change order
Settings available with the [TX Setting] button

Item Specify destination Description To select from a list of destinations, click the [Select from List] button. A destination can also be searched for using its number, index characters or type. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. This setting appears if multiple documents were selected. To send multiple documents together, select this check box. This setting is not available if 11 or more documents are selected. Select the file format ("PDF", "JPEG", "TIFF", "Compact PDF" or "XPS"). The "JPEG" setting cannot be selected for a received fax saved in a user box. Select the page setting ("Multi Page" or "Single Page"). This appears if multiple documents were selected. Select a document, and then click the [Top], [Up], [Down] or [Bottom] button to change the document order. To return the documents to their original order, click the [Undo] button. To display the document list as thumbnails, click the [Thumbnail View] button.
Bind TX
File Type Page Setting Change order
6-19
6
Settings available with the [Download Setting] button
Item Number of Originals Color Type File Format Page Range Description
Displays the number of pages in the original. Displays the color type. Select the file format ("PDF", "JPEG", "TIFF" or "Compact PDF"). Specify the pages to be downloaded. If "Page" is selected, specify the starting and ending pages. If multiple documents were selected, "ALL" is selected. If "JPEG" was selected as the file format, "Page" is selected. This appears if multiple documents were selected. Select a document, and then click the [Top], [Up], [Down] or [Bottom] button to change the document order. To return the documents to their original order, click the [Undo] button. To display the document list as thumbnails, click the [Thumbnail View] button.
Change order
Settings available with the [Move/Copy Setting] button

Item User Box Number Description To select a destination from the list of user boxes, click the [Search from List] button. A destination can also be searched for using the page number or index characters. Select this check box to copy the document.
Copy
Settings available with the [Delete] button

Item Selected File Description Displays the names of the selected documents. When multiple documents are selected, the [Thumbnail View] button appears. To display the documents as thumbnails, click the [Thumbnail View] button.
6-20
PageScope Web Connection Operations Changing user box settings % In the File List page, click the [User Box Setting] button.
Item User Box Number User Box Name Index Auto Delete Document User Box Expansion Function is changed. User Box Password is changed. User Box Owner is changed.
Description Displays the user box number. This cannot be changed. Type in a user box name of a maximum of 20 characters. Select the indexing characters. Select the length of time ("Save", "12 hours", "1 day", "2 days", "3 days", "7 days" or "30 days") that a document is stored in a user box. This setting appears when the optional fax kit is installed. To change the confidential reception function, select the check box. Select "ON" or "OFF", and then specify the password (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #). To change the user box password, select the check box. Type in the current password and the new password (up to 8 characters, excluding " and +). Select this when changing the User Box owner, and select the Box Type. To change the user box owner, select the check box, and then select the user box type. If "Personal" or "Group" is selected, specify the user box owner. To select a user box owner from a list, click the [User List] or [Account List] button. "Owner Name" does not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled.
6-21
6
Create User Box New user boxes can be created.
Item User Box Number
Description Select how the registration number is to be specified ("Use opening number" or "Input directly"). If "Input directly" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. (Range: 1 to 999999999). Type in the user box name (up to 20 characters). If a user box password is to be specified, select the "Use Box Password" check box, and then type in the password (up to 8 characters, excluding " and +). Select the indexing characters. Select the user box type. If "Personal" or "Group" is selected, specify the user box owner. To select a user box owner from a list, click the [User List] or [Account List] button. The lists do not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled. Select the length of time ("Save", "12 hours", "1 day", "2 days", "3 days", "7 days" or "30 days") that a document is stored in a user box. This setting appears when the optional fax kit is installed. To specify the confidential reception setting, click the [Display] button. Select the check box, and then specify the communication password (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #).
User Box Name
Index Type
Auto Delete Document User Box Expansion Function
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", only a password containing 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "Enable".
2
Note
If an administrator is logged on, only public user boxes can be created, and they cannot be changed.
6-22
PageScope Web Connection Operations Open System User Box
"Open System User Box" appears when the optional fax kit is installed. System user boxes (Bulletin Board User Box, Polling TX User Box, Memory RX User Box, Relay User Box) can be opened, and basic user box information and the list of documents saved in the user box can be displayed.
2
Note
If an administrator is logged on, system user boxes are displayed in the same way as in Administrator mode.
% Select the system user box type, and then click the [OK] button.
If "Bulletin Board User Box" or "Relay User Box" is selected, a list of currently available user boxes appears. Type in the user box number and password, and then click the [OK] button. Otherwise, click the name of the desired user box in the list. If a user box password was specified, type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. If "Memory RX User Box" is selected, type in the password, and then click the [OK] button. The user box information appears.
6-23
6
For a bulletin board user box
2
Note
Depending on the user box type, some displays and operations may not be available.
For details on the document operations, refer to "Document operations" on page 6-18. % For bulletin board user boxes and relay user boxes, click the [User Box Setting] button to change user box settings.
Change settings of the bulletin board user box

Item User Box Number User Box Name Auto Delete Document User Box Password is changed. User Box Owner is changed. Description Displays the user box number. This cannot be changed. Type in a user box name (up to 20 characters). Select the length of time ("Save", "12 hours", "1 day", "2 days", "3 days", "7 days" or "30 days") that a document is stored in a user box. To change the user box password, select the check box. Type in the current password and the new password (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #). To change the user box owner, select the check box, and then select the user box type. If "Personal" or "Group" is selected, specify the user box owner. To select a user box owner from a list, click the [User List] or [Account List] button. "Owner Name" does not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled.
6-24
PageScope Web Connection Operations Change settings of the relay user box
Item User Box Number User Box Name Relay Address Relay TX Password is changed. Description Displays the user box number. This cannot be changed. Type in a user box name (up to 20 characters). Specify the relay address. Click the [Search from List] button, and then select an address from a list.
To change the user box password, select the check box. Type in the current password and the new password (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #).
Create System User Box "Create System User Box" appears when the optional fax kit is installed. New bulletin board user boxes and relay user boxes can be created. % Select the user box type, and then click the [OK] button.
2
Note
If an administrator is logged on, system user boxes are created in the same way as in Administrator mode.
For a bulletin board user box
6-25
6
Item User Box Number Description
Select how the registration number is to be specified ("Use opening number" or "Input directly"). If "Input directly" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. (Range: 1 to 999999999). Type in the user box name (up to 20 characters). If a user box password is to be specified, check the "Use Box Password" check box, and then type in the password (up to 8 characters, excluding " and +). Select the user box type. If "Personal" or "Group" is selected, specify the user box owner. To select a user box owner from a list, click the [User List] or [Account List] button. The lists do not appear if the intermediate authentication server is enabled. Select the length of time ("Save", "12 hours", "1 day", "2 days", "3 days", "7 days" or "30 days") that a document is stored in a user box.
User Box Name
Type
Auto Delete Document
For a relay user box

Item User Box Number Description Select how the registration number is to be specified ("Use opening number" or "Input directly"). If "Input directly" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. (Range: 1 to 999999999). Type in the user box name (up to 20 characters). Click the [Search from List] button, and then select an address from a list. Type in the relay password (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #). Type in the relay password again (up to 8 characters, including only numerals, * and #).
User Box Name Relay Address Relay TX Password Retype Relay TX Password
2
Reminder
If "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", only a password containing 8 digits can be specified. If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters before setting "Password Rules" to "Enable".
6-26
6.4
Direct Print tab

From the Direct Print tab, files can be specified and printed. Direct Print % Click the [Browse] button to select the file, and then click the [Print] button.
To change the print settings that are displayed, click the [Change Settings] button.
2
Note
If authentication settings have been specified and "Print without Authentication" is set to "Allow", direct printing can be used. Specify the setting for "Print without Authentication" from the control panel. Some files cannot be printed, depending on their file format. Files in the following file formats can be printed: XPS/PDF/TIFF/PS/PCL/JPEG/Text/XPS
6-27
6
6.5 Store Address tab
From the Store Address tab, transmission destinations and user box destinations for saving data can be registered and their settings can be changed.
!
Detail
This menu appears if the user is permitted to change registered destinations. If a registered user is logged on, new destinations cannot be created unless the user is given access to the destinations. Displaying the list of registered destinations and specifying "Reference Allowed Setting" for registered destinations may be limited, depending on the access permission level of the user who is logged on.
Address Book The list of destinations currently registered in the address book can be displayed, and destinations can be registered or their settings can be changed.
Item [New Registration] button Search from Number Search from Index No. Function Name S/MIME [Edit] button
Description Click this button to register a new destination. For details, refer to "Registering a destination" on page 6-29. Select a range of registration numbers, and then click the [Go] button to display the list of destinations with the displayed numbers. Select index characters, and then click the [Go] button to display the list of destinations with the displayed index characters. Displays the registration number. Displays the specified transmission type. Displays the name of the registered destination. Shows whether or not a certificate is attached to the e-mail destination. Click this button to display a page for changing the settings and editing the registered destination. The settings are the same ones available during registration. Cannot change the registration number. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered destination.
[Delete] button
6-28
PageScope Web Connection Operations Registering a destination
1 2
In the Address Book List page, click the [New Registration] button. Select the transmission type, and then click the [OK] button.
A page for registering a destination appears. For an e-mail address
6-29
6
If "E-mail" was selected
Item No. Description
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the e-mail address of the destination (up to 320 characters). Select this check box to register certificate information. Select "Registration of Certification Information". Click the [Browse] button, and then specify the certificate information. Only files in the DER (Distinguished Encoding Rules) format are supported for certificate information. To delete the certificate information, select "Deletion of Certification Information". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Name Index E-mail Address Registration of Certification Information
Limiting Access to Destinations
2
Reminder
If the E-mail address to be registered does not match the E-mail address of the certificate, the certificate cannot be registered. Confirm whether both E-mail addresses match, and then register the certificate.
If "FTP" was selected
Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the IP address or host name for the FTP server to be used for transmitting (up to 63 characters). To type in the host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Type in the destination file path (up to 96 characters). Type in the user ID (up to 47 characters). Type in the password (up to 31 characters). Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select either "ON" or "OFF". Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535; Default: 21) To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Name Index Host Address
File Path User ID Password anonymous PASV Mode Proxy Port No. Limiting Access to Destinations
6-30
PageScope Web Connection Operations If "SMB" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box.
Type in the IP address or host name for the destination computer (up to 255 characters; host name in uppercase letters). To type in the host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Type in the destination file path (up to 255 characters, uppercase letters). Type in the user ID for the destination computer (up to 127 characters). Type in the password for the destination computer (up to 14 characters). To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
File Path User ID Password Limiting Access to Destinations
If "WebDAV" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the IP address or host name for the WebDAV server to be used for transmitting (up to 63 characters). To type in the host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Type in the destination file path (up to 96 characters). Type in the user ID (up to 47 characters). Type in the password (up to 31 characters). Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select either "ON" or "OFF". Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535; Default: 80) To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
File Path User ID Password SSL Settings Proxy Port No. Limiting Access to Destinations
6-31
6
If "User Box" was selected
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, select the "Main" check box. Type in the number for the destination user box. (Range: 1 to 999999999) A user box can also be selected from a list by clicking the [Search from List] button. To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Name Index User Box No. Limiting Access to Destinations
If "Fax" was selected
2
Note
"Fax" appears if the optional fax kit has been installed.
Item No.
Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the fax number for the destination (up to 38 characters, including only numerals, #, *, -, T, P and E). Select the line to be used ("No Selection", "Line 1" or "Line 2"). A setting can be selected if the optional fax multi line is installed. Click the [Display] button, and then select the check box for a displayed setting ("V34 off", "ECM Off", "International Communication" or "Check Destination"). To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Name Index Destination Line Setting Communication Setting Limiting Access to Destinations
6-32
PageScope Web Connection Operations If "IP Address Fax" was selected
2
Note
"IP Address Fax" appears if the IP address fax operation is available.
Item No.
Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the IP address or host name for the destination fax (up to 63 characters). To type in the host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535; Default: 25) Select whether the destination is a color or monochrome machine. To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Port No. Destination Machine Type Limiting Access to Destinations
If "Internet Fax" was selected
2
Note
"Internet Fax" appears if the Internet fax operation is available.
Item No.
Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). Select the index characters for the destination. To normally display the destination in the touch panel, check the "Main" check box. Type in the address of the destination (up to 320 characters). Select the resolution. Select the paper size. Select the compression method. To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Name Index E-Mail Address Resolution Paper Size Compression Type Limiting Access to Destinations
6-33
6
Group
The list of currently registered group destinations can be displayed, and destinations can be registered or their settings can be changed.
Item [New Registration] button Search from Number No. Name [Edit] button [Delete] button
Description Click this button to register a new destination. For details, refer to "Registering a group destination" on page 6-35. Select a range of registration numbers, and then click the [Go] button to display the list of destinations with the displayed numbers. Displays the registration number. Displays the name of the registered destination. Click this button to display a page for changing the settings and editing the registered destination. The settings are the same ones available during registration. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered destination.
6-34
PageScope Web Connection Operations Registering a group destination % In the Group List page, click the [New Registration] button. A page for registering a destination appears.
Item Name Scan/Fax Address
Description Type in the name of the destination (up to 24 characters). To select a destination number from a list of address book destinations, click the [Search from List] button. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number, index characters or type. To select a destination number from a list of address book destinations, click the [Search from List] button. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. A page for checking the destinations appears. To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
User Box
[Check Destination] button Limiting Access to Destinations
6-35
6-36
PageScope Web Connection Operations Program
The list of currently registered program destinations can be displayed, and destinations can be registered or their settings can be changed.
Item Page (displays 12 at a time) [Change Page Name] button No. Name S/MIME Edit
Description Select a page, and then click the [Go] button to display the page. Click this button to change the page name. Displays the registration number. Displays the name of the registered destination. Shows whether or not a certificate is attached to the destination. If no program destination is registered, the [Registration] button appears. If a program destination is registered, the [Edit] button appears. Click the button to display the page for specifying the settings to either register or edit a program destination. E-mail destinations where an S/MIME certificate is registered cannot be changed. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered destination.
[Delete] button
6-37
6
Registering a program destination
1 2
In the Program List page, click the [Registration] button for the number to be programmed. Select the transmission type, and then click the [OK] button.
A page for registering a destination appears.
6-38
PageScope Web Connection Operations For an e-mail address
!
Detail
To select a registered program destination from the machine, press the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel.
6-39
6
If "E-mail" was selected.
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters). Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Specify the e-mail subject ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default subject is used. To check the content of the subject, click the [Subject List] button. Specify the e-mail text ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default text is used. To check the content of the text, click the [Text List] button. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size
Name Destination Information
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Subject
Text
Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size
Application Setting Original Direction 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Book Scan
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
6-40
6
Description Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Compose (Page)
Compose (Header/Footer)
Compose (Stamp)
Stamp Combine Method Limiting Access to Destinations
If "FTP" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, specify settings for the following. Host Address File Path User ID Password anonymous PASV Mode Proxy Port No. To type in the host address and host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting.
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color
6-41
6
Item Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size Description Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust density of the background.
Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable e-mail notification. If "ON" is selected, specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Application Setting E-mail Notification
Original Direction 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Book Scan
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
6-42
PageScope Web Connection Operations If "SMB" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters).
Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, specify settings for the following. Host Address (Type the host name in uppercase letters.) File Path (Type in uppercase letters.) User ID Password To type in the host address and host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable e-mail notification. If "ON" is selected, specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
6-43
6
Item Compose (Page) Description
Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Compose (Stamp)
If "WebDAV" was selected

Item No. Name Destination Information Description Displays the registration number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, specify settings for the following. Host Address File Path User ID Password SSL Settings Proxy Port No. To type in the host address and host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust density of the background.
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal
6-44
6
Description Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Specify whether to send notification of scan data URL. Specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Specify whether to perform book scan. To specify this item, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding direction. Specify whether to perform frame erase. To specify this item, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Specify whether to print the date/time. To specify this item, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Specify whether to pint page numbers. To specify this item, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Selects whether to print a header/footer. To specify this item, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Specify whether to print the stamp. To specify this item, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Scan Size
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
6-45
6
If "User Box" was selected
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number for the user box destination, or click the [Select from List] button and select from the list (1 to 999999999). Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable e-mail notification. If "ON" is selected, specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
6-46
6
Description Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
6-47
6
If "Fax" was selected
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the address (up to 38 characters, including only numerals, #, *, T, P and E). Click the [Display] button beside "Communication Setting", and then select the communication setting ("V34 Off", "ECM Off", "International Communication", "Check Destination"). If the optional fax multi line is installed, the line can be selected. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto" or "Standard Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable timer transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the time. Select whether or not to enable password transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the password. Select whether or not to enable F-codes. If "Enable" is selected, type in the SUB address and password. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button.
Resolution File Type Simplex/Duplex Original Type Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size Application Setting Timer TX Password TX F-Code 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
6-48
6
Description Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Compose (Stamp)
If "IP Address Fax" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the host address. To type in the host name, check the "Please check to enter host name." check box. If the machine is set to use IPv6, an IPv6 address can also be specified. Type in the port number, and then select the destination type. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto" or "Standard Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable password transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the password. Select whether or not to enable F-codes. If "Enable" is selected, type in the SUB address and password. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right").
Resolution File Type Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size Application Setting Password TX F-Code 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Erase
6-49
6
Item Compose (Date/Time) Description
Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
If "Internet Fax" was selected

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. Select "Select from Address Book" or "Direct Input". To select a destination from the address book, click the [Search from List] button, and then select from the list of address book destinations. An address book destination can also be searched for using its number or index characters. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the e-mail destination. Select settings for the resolution, paper size and compression method. Select the resolution. Specify the e-mail subject ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default subject is used. To check the content of the subject, click the [Subject List] button. Specify the e-mail text ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default text is used. To check the content of the text, click the [Text List] button. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select either "ON" or "OFF".
Resolution Subject
Text
Simplex/Duplex Original Type Separate Scan
6-50
6
Description Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto" or "Standard Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Density Background Removal Scan Size Application Setting 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
6-51
6
If "Group" was selected.
Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Specify the destination. To select from a list of group destinations, click the [Search from List] button. A group destination can also be searched for using its number. To check the transmission destinations, click the [Check Destination] button. Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Specify the e-mail subject ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default subject is used. To check the content of the subject, click the [Subject List] button. Specify the e-mail text ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default text is used. To check the content of the text, click the [Text List] button. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF". Select the density. Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable e-mail notification. If "ON" is selected, specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select whether or not to enable timer transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the time. Select whether or not to enable password transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the password. Select whether or not to enable F-codes. If "Enable" is selected, type in the SUB address and password. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right").
Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Subject
Text
Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan Density Background Removal Scan Size
Timer TX Password TX F-Code Original Direction 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Book Scan
Erase
6-52
6
Description Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Item Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
If "No Destination" was selected.

Item No. Description Specify the registration number. Select "Use opening number" or "Direct Input". If "Direct Input" is selected, type in the number. If "0" is specified, the user box is automatically registered with the next available number. Type in the name of the program (up to 24 characters). Select the resolution. Select the file format. Type in the file name (up to 30 characters). Select how the data is to be saved. Specify the e-mail subject ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default subject is used. To check the content of the subject, click the [Subject List] button. Specify the e-mail text ("Not Specified" or 1 through 10). If "Not Specified" is selected, the default text is used. To check the content of the text, click the [Text List] button. Select "1-Sided", "2-Sided" or "Cover Sheet + 2-Sided". Select the document quality, such as text or photo. Select the color mode. The file formats that can be saved may be limited according to the Color setting. Select either "ON" or "OFF".
Name Resolution File Type File Name Page Setting Subject
Text
Simplex/Duplex Original Type Color Separate Scan
6-53
6
Item Density Background Removal Scan Size Description Select the density.
Adjust the density of the background. Select the document size ("Auto", "Standard Size" or "Custom Size"). If "Standard Size" is selected, select the size and the feed direction. If "Custom Size" is selected, specify the height and width. Click the [Display] button, and then specify settings for the functions that are displayed. Select whether or not to enable e-mail notification. If "ON" is selected, specify the destination address in the "Address" box. To select a destination from a list, click the [Search from List] button. Select whether or not to enable timer transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the time. Select whether or not to enable password transmission. If "ON" is selected, specify the password. Select whether or not to enable F-codes. If "Enabled" is selected, type in the SUB address and password. Select the document orientation. Select the position of the document binding margin. Select "Normal", "Mixed Original", "Z-Folded Original" or "Long Original" as the setting for the loaded document. Select whether or not to enable book scanning. If "ON" is selected, select settings for the scanning method and center erasing. If any setting other than "Book Spread" is selected for the scanning method, select the binding position. Select whether or not to enable frame erasing. If "ON" is selected, specify the width that is erased on all sides of the document ("Top", "Bottom", "Left" and "Right"). Select whether or not to print the date/time. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Date Type Time Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size Select whether or not to print the page number. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Page Number (Range: -99999 to 99999) Chapter (Range: -100 to 100) Page Number Type Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Size Select whether or not to print the header/footer. If "ON" is selected, specify the registration number of the header/footer. To check the registered header/foot, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. Select whether or not to print the stamp. If "ON" is selected, specify settings for the following. Preset Stamp or Registered Stamp Print Position Fine-Tune (for making fine adjustments to the print position) Color Pages Size To check a registered stamp, click the [Confirm Registed Contents] button. A registered stamp must first be registered from the control panel. Select "Image" or "Text". To specify the access level of the destination, click the [Display] button. If an access permission group is specified for the user who is logged on, the settings for "Search from Reference Allowed Group" appear. If "Search from Reference Allowed Group" is selected, click the [Search from List] button, and then select an access permission group from the list. If "Set direct Reference Allowed Level" is selected, select a level.
Timer TX Password TX F-Code Original Direction 2-Sided Binding Direction Special Original Book Scan
Erase
Compose (Date/Time)
Compose (Page)
Compose (Stamp)
6-54
PageScope Web Connection Operations Temporary One-Touch Destinations that will be used temporarily can be registered.
The list of currently registered temporary programs can be displayed, and new destinations can be registered or their settings can be changed.
2
Note
"Temporary One-Touch" appears if "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Allow". Specify the setting for "Manual Destination Input" from the control panel.
Item No. Name [Edit] button [Delete] button
Description Displays the registration number. Displays the registered name. Click this button to display a page to change the settings for the registered temporary program. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered temporary program.
1 2
In the Temporary One-Touch List page, click the [Registration] button. Select the transmission type, and then click the [OK] button to display a page to register a new temporary program. The settings are the same ones available when registering a program. For details, refer to "Program" on page 6-37.
!
Detail
The Limiting Access to Destinations Settings do not appear for Temporary One-Touch. To select a registered temporary program from the machine, press the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel, and then touch [Page List], then [Temporary One-Touch].
6-55
6
Subject
A maximum of 10 subjects for sending e-mail messages can be registered.
Item E-mail Default Subject [Edit] button [Delete] button
Description Select the subject to be used if none is specified when sending e-mail. Displays the registered e-mail subject. Click this button to display a page to register and edit e-mail subjects. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered e-mail subject.
Registration page
6-56
PageScope Web Connection Operations Text A maximum of 10 texts for sending e-mail messages can be registered.
Item E-mail Default Text [Edit] button [Delete] button
Description Select the text to be used if none is specified when sending e-mail. Displays the registered e-mail text. Click this button to display a page to register and edit e-mail texts. Click this button to display a page to delete the registered e-mail text.
Registration page
6-57
6-58
7
7.1

General fax operation
This section contains information about general operations for sending a fax.
!
Detail
Color faxes cannot be sent and received. Use scan functions to send a colored fax.
Sending a fax
!
Detail
The procedure for faxing a single-sided original using basic operations is explained here. Various functions that make sending faxes more convenient are provided in this machine.
1 2
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Position the original to be faxed.
For details on positioning the original, refer to "Loading the original" on page 7-6.
Touch [Scan Settings], specify the desired function and touch [OK].
7-3
7
Scan Setting functions are specified as follows at the time of purchase. [Original Type]: Text/Photo (Printed Photo) [Simplex/Duplex]: 1-Sided [Resolution]: 200e200dpi (Fine) [Density]: Standard [File Type] is not available in Fax mode.
For details on specifying basic scan settings, refer to "Specifying scanning conditions" on page 7-9.
Touch [Original Settings], specify the desired function and touch [OK].
Touch [Communication Settings], specify the desired function and touch [Close].
7-4
Specify the recipients fax number. For details on procedures for specifying a fax number, refer to "Specifying only one destination" on page 7-13 and "Specifying multiple destinations (Sequential broadcast transmission or broadcast transmission)" on page 7-19. The destination can be specified in any of the following ways. Address Book Direct Input Group destination Program destination To cancel a selected destination, re-select the destination you wish cancel. Entered numbers and selected settings are all cleared by pressing [Reset] key. When [Manual Destination Input] is forbidden, the [Direct Input] tab will not be displyed. Recepient fax numbers can be specified more easily by registering the recipients fax number to the Address Book, Group destinations, or Program destinations. Entered destinations are displayed in the Broadcast Destinations list in the left panel of the screen.
Press [Start] key. The following screen is displayed when the TX Result Report Check screen is set to display. The TX Result Report is printed by touching [Yes].
When the Destination Check Display Function is set, the Destination Settings screen is displayed. Confirm that the destination is correct and touch [Send]. To abort tranmission of a fax, press [Stop] key. If the fax could not be sent, a TX Result Report is printed (when the machine has been set to print a TX Result Report). And, it can be set such that the TX Result Report Check screen is displayed so as to enable the selection of whether or not to output the transmission result report screen for every transmission. Scanning of the original begins, and the original is sent.
7-5
7
7.2 Loading the original
The original can be loaded in the ADF or on the original glass in this machine. If the original is loaded in the ADF, the original is scanned automatically from the ADF. Loading the original in the ADF If the ADF is used, originals with multiple pages can be automatically scanned. In addition, double-sided originals can also be faxed.
1 2 3
Close the ADF. Sequentially arrange the original from the first page. Position the original face-up up in the ADF. To record source information correctly, insert the front edge of the original into the ADF.
Adjust the lateral guides. The lateral guides are set to maximum width for mixed originals, and the original is positioned in line with the inner side.
lateral guides
Loading the original on the original glass Using the original glass enables you to send originals that cannot be loaded in the ADF (e.g. thick originals like books, and thin originals).
1 2
Open the ADF. Position the original face down and load the original pages on the left inner side so that they are aligend with the left side of the scale board.
Close the ADF slowly.
7-6
Fax Operations (Option) Faxing a multi-page original using the original glass
All pages of a multi-page original that cannot be loaded into the ADF can be faxed together using the original glass.
1 2 3 4
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Specify the destination. Specify functions if required. Load the original on the original glass, and touch [Scan Settings], [Separate Scan], [OK] and then press [Start] key.
Load the original sequentially on the original glass and press [Start] key. Touching [Change Setting] enables you to alter Simplex/Duplex settings and Frame Erase settings. Repeat this operation until you have scanned the entire original you wish to send. The scanned original is stored in the memory.
6 7
Touch [Finish]. Press [Start] key. Transmission begins.
7-7
7
Sending the original using both the ADF and the original glass
Originals can be scanned using both ADF and the original glass, and large numbers of originals can be divided into many parts, loaded in the ADF and scanned.
1 2 3 4
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Specify the destination. Specify functions if required. Load the original on the original glass or in the ADF, and touch [Scan Settings], [Separate Scan], [OK] and then press [Start] key. When using the original glass and the ADF, the ADF is given priority.
For details on loading originals in the ADF, refer to "Loading the original in the ADF" on page 7-6, and for details on loading originals on the platen glass, refer to "Loading the original on the original glass" on page 7-6.
Load the original sequentially in the ADF or on the original glass and press [Start] key. Touching [Change Setting] enables you to alter Simplex/Duplex settings and Frame Erase settings. Repeat this operation until you have scanned the entire original you wish to send. The scanned original is stored in the memory.
6 7
Touch [Finish]. Press [Start] key. Transmission begins.
7-8
7.3
Specifying scanning conditions

Touching [Scanning Settings] on the Fax/Scan screen displays [Original Type], [Simplex/Duplex], [Resolution] and [Density], and enables you to specify transmission conditions for the original to be sent.
2
Note
[File Type] cannot be used in Fax mode.

Specifying scanning settings
2
Note
You cannot specify different transmission conditions for different pages within one original.
1 2
Touch [Scanning Settings] on the Fax/Scan screen. Touch the button you wish to specify.
7-9
7
Original type % Set the original type according to the content of the original.
There are 5 types of original type settings. At the time of purchase, original type is set to [Text/Photo]. [Text]: Touch when scanning text-only originals. If you select this mode for scanning originals with photos, none of the images intermediate colors will be reproduced, and the image will darken. [Text/Photo]: Touch when originals with text and photos (half tone) mixed together, are to be scanned. Select this mode when text and photos are mixed together on 1 pages or when text and photos are mixed together on multiple pages. [Photo]: Touch when scanning photo-only (half tone) originals. [Dot Matrix Original]: Touch when text has been written lightly on originals to be scanned, for example by pencil etc. [Copied Paper]: Touch when scanning a copied image as the original. Simplex/Duplex % Set a scanning method for the ADF according to the state of the original.
There are 3 types of scanning settings. At the time of purchase, the machine is set to [1-Sided]. [1-Sided]: Touch to scan 1-sided originals. [2-Sided]: Touch to scan 2-sided originals. [Cover + 2-Sided]: Touch to scan 2-sided originals with covers. Scans the first page of the original as the cover page only on one side and scans the remaining pages on both sides.
7-10
Fax Operations (Option) Resolution % Sets the scanning resolution for the original.
There are 5 types of resolution settings. At the time of purchase, resolution is set to [200e200 Fine]. [200e100 (Standard)]: Touch when you wish to reduce transmission time. [200e200 (Fine)]: Touch when scanning normal originals. [300e300 dpi]: Touch when scanning a normal original at a higher resolution. [400e400 (Super Fine)]: Touch when scanning originals containing small text and images. [600e600 (Ultra Fine)]: Touch when scanning originals containing particularly fine text and drawings.
!
Detail
Using more defined resolutions when scanning increases the volume of data sent and increases communication time. If [400e400 (Super Fine] or [600e600 (Ultra Fine)] are selected, and the recipients machine is unable to receive faxes of these resolutions, the fax is sent at a resolution compatible with recipients machines capabilities.
7-11
7
Density % Set the density according to the content of the original.
Density can be set at 9 different levels. At the time of purchase, density is set to [Standard]. [Light]: Touch for light-density scanning. [Standard]: Touch for standard-density scanning. [Dark]: Touch for darker-density scanning.
7-12
7.4
Specifying only one destination

The following methods are possible for specifying one destination only. Specifying from registered destinations Specifying by direct input Specifying from job history Specifying from program destinations
!
Detail
Refer to "Specifying from registered destinations" on page 7-13 regarding methods for specifying from the registered destinations. Refer to "Specifying by direct input" on page 7-17 regarding methods for specifying by direct input. Refer to "Specifying from the job history" on page 7-18 regarding methods for specifying from the job history. Refer to "Sending a fax using a program destination" on page 7-21 regarding methods for specifying from the program destinations.
Specifying from registered destinations When an Address Book has been registered, you can search for the destination by the registered search word and dial the destination.
!
Detail
Refer to "Searching for a registered destination (Index button)" on page 7-14 regarding registered destination search methods used by touching the Index button. Refer to "Searching for a registered destination (Address type)" on page 7-14 regarding searching by destination type. Refer to "Searching for registered destinations (Detail search)" on page 7-15 regarding entering details to conduct searches.
% Touch the desired destination button displayed in the [Address Book] tab. To cancel a selected destination, re-select the destination you wish to cancel. If [Reset] key is pressed, the selected address and the settings are cleared. When desired destination button is not displayed, it can be searched for using the following methods. Touch the Index button Search by destination type Enter the details and search
The destination is specified.
7-13
7
Searching for a registered destination (Index button)
Destinations can be searched for using the specified search word when a destination is registered.
!
Detail
The index default display can be changed with the Address Book Index Default Setting.
% Touch Index buttons ([Favorites], [ABC] - [WXYZ], [etc]) displayed in the [Address Book] tab.
Desired destination button is displayed. Searching for a registered destination (Address type) Destinations can be searched by the address type (Fax, E-mail etc.).
Touch [Search] in the [Address Book] tab.
Touch [Address Type].
7-14
Select the address type. If the button for the desired destination type is not displayed, touch or . The default display settings of the [Address Book] tab can be changed to address type with the Default Address Book setting.
Desired destination button is displayed. Searching for registered destinations (Detail search) Destinations can be searched using part of the destination name or fax number.
Touch [Detail Search].
When a destination applicable to the entered information is not found, "Search Result: 0" is displayed and no button is on the screen.
7-15
7
3
Touch [Name] or [Address].
Enter the name or fax number using the keyboard displayed on the screen and touch [OK]. If "Uppercase and Lowercase Letters" in the Search Option Settings screen of Utility mode is set to "Differentiate", the search is performed while differentiating between uppercase and lowercase letters. If "Search Option Screen" in the Search Option Settings screen of Utility mode is set to "ON", the Search Option screen is displayed.
To select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, display the Search Options screen.
Desired destination button is displayed.
7-16
Fax Operations (Option) Specifying by direct input
A destination can be specified by direct input even if the destination is not registered with the address book.
2
Note
When [Manual Destination Input] is forbidden, the [Direct Input] tab is not displayed.
% Enter the fax number of the recipient. Enter the fax number of the recipient using the keypad. Entered numbers are all cleared by pressing [C] (clear) key. To recall a registered address book destination, touch [Enter Registered No.], type in the registration number for an address book destination, and then touch [Apply].
Special dialing symbols such as tone, pause, -, etc. are entered if necessary. [Tone]: If pulse dialing is being used, touch this button to send a push-button tone. Tone is used when a fax data services, etc are used. "T" appears on the screen. [Pause]: Touch this button to insert a pause when dialing. Touch [Pause] once to insert a 1-second pause; multiple pauses can be entered. "P" appears on the screen. [-]: Entered as a delimiter when dialing. This has no effect on dailing. "-" appears on the screen. A fax number can also be entered by using the keypad in the screen that appears after touching [Direct Input], then [Fax]. When the keypad is used, the fax number can be entered directly even when [Address Book] tab or the [Job History] tab is displayed. When using a dial (pulse) line, it is possible to change to push tone by just touching [*]. The destination is specified.
!
Detail
When a PBX (Private branch exchange) connection is set to active and a fax is sent from an internal line to an external line, touch [Pause] after dialing "0" or the external line number, to ensure the number is dial correctly. "P" appears in the screen.
7-17
7
Specifying from the job history
It is possible to specify number from the job history, which lists numbers you have sent faxes to in the past (from the previous five numbers).
Touch [Job History] on the Fax/Scan screen.
Select the desired destination from the list. To cancel a selected destination, re-select the destination you wish to cancel. Selected destinations and settings are all cleared by pressing [Reset] key. Touching [Dest] displayed on the side of the job history list switches the destination column names to fax numbers.
7-18
7.5
Specifying multiple destinations (Sequential broadcast transmission or broadcast transmission)

An original can be sent to multiple destinations with one operation. This function is called a sequential broadcast transmission or broadcast transmission. The following procedure describes how to specify multiple destinations. Specifying from registered destinations Specifying by direct input Specifying from the job history Specifying by using the group button Specifying from the program destinations Destinations can be specified with a combination of above-mentioned methods.
!
Detail
Refer to "Specifying multiple destinations (from registered destinations, direct input, job history)" on page 7-19 regarding specifying destinations from registered destinations, direct input and the job history. Refer to "Specifying multiple destinations (using the group button)" on page 7-19 for the regarding to specifying destinations using the group button. Refer to "Sending a fax using a program destination" on page 7-21 regarding specifying a program destination.
Specifying multiple destinations (from registered destinations, direct input, job history) % Refer to "Specifying only one destination" on page 7-13, and specify only the destinations you wish to send to. When selecting multiple registered destinations or destinations from the job history, touch the required destinations one after another. When multiple destinations are specified by direct input, subsequent detinations are entered by touching [Next Destination] after a destination has been entered. To cancel a selected registered destination or destination from job history, re-select the destination you wish to cancel. Selected destinations and settings are all cleared by pressing [Reset] key. Multiple destinations are specified.
Specifying multiple destinations (using the group button)
7-19
7
2
Touch [Group]. If [Group] is not displayed, touch or .
Touch the desired group button. Multiple destinations are specified.
!
Detail
The default display settings of the [Address Book] tab can be changed to address type with the Default Address Book setting. A maximum of 605 destinations (500 address book destinations, 100 direct input destinations and 5 direct input e-mail addresses) can be specified.
7-20
7.6
Sending a fax using a program destination

When a program address has been registered, a fax can be sent by specifying the registered program button. If transmission settings (Original type and original specification etc.) are registered by a program key, a fax can be sent by simply touching that button without the need for specifying function settings each time. It is also possible to register a group button in 1 program button to send a fax once or register a time and send faxes at the same time each day. To send a fax after specifying a program destination
1 2 3
Press [Fax/Scan] key, and the Fax/Scan screen is displayed. Load the original to be faxed. Refer to "Loading the original" on page 7-6 for details on loading the original.
Press [Mode Memory] key.
Touch [Page List].
Touch the page button in which the desired program destination is registered, and then touch [OK]. Touch or to display the previous or next page button screen.
7-21
7
6
Touch the desired program button and touch [OK]. Only one program destination can be specified. Touch or to display the previous or next program button screen.
Settings and destinations are recalled.
Press [Start] key. Scanning of the original begins, and the original is sent.
7-22
7.7
Operations while scanning

If original size cannot be detected If the original size cannot be detected, the scan size screen is displayed. Set the original size.
Touch the Original Size button and then touch [OK].
2 3
Touch [Close] and then touch [OK]. Fax/Scan screen is displayed. Press [Start] key. Fax is sent.
When there is a memory overflow When using memory transmission, if the original contains many pages or when the original contains images with fine details creating a large amount of data, the memory may became full. In such cases, set the machine to Quick Memory TX and send the fax (Quick Memory TX can be set at the Communication Method Settings in the Communication Settings screen). Original auto rotation An A4 or 8-1/2 e 11 original loaded in the v orientation is automatically rotated and sent in the w orientation. When A4 or 8-1/2 e 11 document pages are loaded in the v orientation to be sent together with longer document pages, the A4 or 8-1/2 e 11 document pages are sent without being rotated to the w orientation. In this case, it can be rotated and transmitted by setting the machine to mixed original.
2
Note
When you do not wish to conduct auto rotation, contact your technical representative.
7-23
7
7.8 When unable to send
If the fax cannot be sent because the recipients line is busy, it can be transmitted again by using the redial function. The redial function of this machine has auto redial, manual redial and resend functions.
2
Note
The destination cannot be changed for either auto redial or manual redial in the Current Jobs List.
Redial Dialing the same destination again is called "redialing". When a fax cannot be sent because the recipients fax machine line is busy, the number is redialed after a set period has elapsed. Until it is redialed, the job to be sent is treated as a reserved job standing by to be redialed. Auto redial function When you are unable to send a fax because the recipients line is busy, the machine automatically redials the number of times set via the Line Parameter Setting.
!
Detail
The number of auto redials set in advance is 3 times, at three-minute intervals.

Manual redial (Current jobs list) This operation enables you to manually redial jobs waiting to be redialed.
1 2 3
Touch [Job List], and then touch [Job Details]. Touch [Send]. Select a job with the status [Waiting To Redial] and then select [Redial]. When fax multi line is not installed
7-24
Fax Operations (Option) When fax multi line is installed
The redial screen is displayed.
Touch [OK]. Redialing of the selected job is performed.
7-25
7
Manual redial (Fax retransmit user box)
Even if the auto redial frequency exceeds the one specified by the Line Parameter Setting, if the job cannot be sent, it is saved in the Fax Retransmit User Box. Jobs in the Fax Retransmit User Box can be manually redialed.
!
Detail
You need to set Incomplete TX Hold setting in the Utility mode to "Yes" to resend.
1 2 3 4
Press [User Box] key. Touch [Use Document]. Touch [System User Box]. Touch [Fax Retransmit User Box] and then touch [OK].
Select the job you wish to resend and touch [Fax].
Confirm the destinations displayed in Broadcast Destinations list and touch [Start] or press [Start] key. The job is resent.
2
Note
It is also possible to change the destination. After resending, the job is automatically deleted from the Fax Retransmit User Box.
7-26
7.9
Reserving a transmission
It is possible to reserve the next transmission while the machine is communicating or printing. This function is called reserved transmission.
2
Note
[Off-Hook] cannot be used for reserved transmission.
Touch [Next Fax/Scan Job]. If [TX Display] or [Copy Operating Screen] is not set to [Yes], [Next Fax/Scan Job] will not be displayed.
Load the original to be faxed.
Refer to "Loading the original" on page 7-6 for details on loading the original.
3 4 5
Specify functions if required. Specify the destination. Press [Start] key.
!
Detail
When you wish to release a reserved transmission, touch [Job List] and then touch [Delete].
7-27
7
7.10 Aborting transmission
Operations for aborting transmissions differ according to whether the job is being executed (including reserved jobs) or timer transmission has been reserved.
2
Note
Jobs to be transmitted that are stored in this machine are called reserved jobs.
Aborting a job during transmission It is possible to abort the transmission of jobs being transmitted (including reserved jobs) by using the following procedure.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Touch [Job List]. Touch [Job Details]. Touch [Send]. Check that the [Current Jobs] is selected. Select the job you wish to abort, and touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] and then touch [OK].
The job is deleted.
Touch [Close]. The machine returns to the Fax/Scan screen.
7-28
Fax Operations (Option) Canceling timer transmission reserved jobs Transmission can be cancelled by deleting timer transmission reserved jobs.
1 2 3 4 5
Touch [Job List]. Touch [Job Details]. Touch [Send]. Check that the [Current Jobs] is selected, and touch [Timer TX Job]. Select the job you wish to abort, and touch [Delete]. Touch or , to display the next screen or previous screen.
Touch [Yes] and then touch [OK].
The job is deleted.
Touch [Close]. The machine returns to the Fax/Scan screen.
7-29
7
7.11 Sending a fax after specifying a time (Timer TX)
Timer TX is a function that specifies a time for transmission.
It is economical to transmit at discounted calling times, such as late at night or early in the morning.
2
Note
The following functions cannot be used together with this function. Total # of Pages setting, Polling TX, Bulletin Board and Quick Memory TX
!
Detail
Only the time can be specified. Dates cannot be specified. Specify the time in hours and minutes. Timer TX can be specified for 21 originals including normal transmission of 20 originals and Polling RX of 1 original.
To conduct timer TX
1 2 3 4 5
Press [Fax/Scan] key, and make the Fax/Scan screen display. Load the original to be faxed. Refer to "Loading the original" on page 7-6 for details on loading the original.
Touch [Communication Settings]. Touch [Communication Settings]. Touch [Timer TX].
7-30
Enter the transmission start time using the keypad. Enter the transmission start time with 2 digits in the 24-hour clock format. Example: Enter "21" and "07" when setting the transmission start time as 9.07 pm. Touch [No] to release timer transmission settings.
7 8 9
Touch [OK] twice, and then touch [Close]. Timer TX is set, and the machine returns to the Fax/Scan screen. Specify other settings if required. For details on Scan Settings, refer to "Specifying scanning conditions" on page 7-9.
Specify the destination. For details regarding specifying destinations, refer to "Specifying only one destination" on page 7-13.
10
Press [Start] key. If the fax cannot be sent because the recipients line is busy, the recipients number is redialed. For details regarding redialling, refer to "When unable to send" on page 7-24. For aborting transmission, refer to "Aborting transmission" on page 7-28. The scanned original is stored in memory as a reserved original and transmission is started at the specified time.
7-31
7-32
8
8.1

General fax operation (Internet fax)
This section contains information about general operations for sending a fax. Sending an internet fax
!
Detail
The procedure for faxing a single-sided original using basic operations is explained here. Various functions for sending a fax more conveniently are provided in this machine.
1 2
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Load the original.
For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
Touch [Scan Settings], specify the desired function and touch [OK].
Scan Setting functions are specified as follows at the time of purchase. [Original Type]: Text/Photo (Printed Photo) [Simplex/Duplex]: 1-Sided [Resolution]: 200e200dpi (Fine) [Density]: Standard
8-3
8
[File Type] is not available in Internet Fax mode.
For details on specifying Basic scan settings, refer to "Specifying the scan conditions" on page 8-11.
Touch [Communication Settings], specify the desired function and touch [Close]
8-4
Specify the E-mail address of the recipient. Address Book Direct Input Group destination Program destination Proceed to procedure 10 to specify a destination as an Address Book, a Group destination or a Program destination. Proceed to procedure 7 to specify a destination by Direct Input. For details on procedures for specifying an E-mail address, refer to "Specifying only one destination" on page 8-14 and "Specifying multiple destinations (Broadcast transmission)" on page 8-20. Re-select the destination to be cancelled to cancel the selected destination. All entered numbers and selected settings are cleared on pressing [Reset] key. When [Manual Destination Input] is prohibited, [Direct Input] tab is not displayed. Recipient E-mail addresses can be specified more easily by registering the recipients E-mail addresses to the Address Book, Group destinations, or Program destinations. Entered destination is displayed in the left panel of Broadcast Destination list.
In case of direct input, enter the E-mail address of the transmission destination and then touch [RX Ability (Destination)].
Select the Compression Type, Paper Size and Resolution to match the recipients reception capability in the recipients machine reception capability screen. Scan Setting functions are specified as follows at the time of purchase. Compression Type: MH Paper Size: A4 Resolution: 200e200dpi (Fine) /200e100dpi (Standard)
9 10
Touch [OK] until it returns to the Fax/Scan screen. Press [Start] key. The following screen is displayed when the TX Result Report Check screen is set for display. The TX Result Report is printed on touching [Yes].
8-5
Network Fax Operations (Option) When the Destination Check Display Function is set, the Destination Settings screen is displayed. Confirm that the destination is correct and touch [Send]. Press [Stop] key when the fax sending is aborted. Scanning of the original begins, and the original is sent.
!
Detail
If the fax could not be sent, a TX Result Report is printed (When specified as to print the TX Result Report). And, it can be set such that the TX Result Report Check screen is displayed so as to enable the selection of whether or not to output the transmission result report screen for every transmission.
2
Reminder
When SMTP server capacity is set in E-Mail TX (SMTP) settings of the Utility mode, there is an error if the size exceeds the set size and transmission is not possible.
8-6
8.2
General fax operation (IP address fax)

This section contains information on the general operation for sending an IP Address Fax. Sending an IP address fax
1 2
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Load the original.
For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26.
Touch [Scan Settings], specify the desired functions and touch [OK].
Scan Setting functions are specified as follows at the time of purchase. [Original Type]: Text/Photo (Printed Photo) [Simplex/Duplex]: 1-Sided [Resolution]: 200e200 dpi (Fine) [Density]: Standard
8-7
Network Fax Operations (Option) [File Type] at the time of IP Address Fax transmission is as follows. In color: PDF In monochrome: TIFF
For details on specifying Basic scan settings, refer to "Specifying the scan conditions" on page 8-11.
Touch [Communication Settings], specify the desired function and touch [Close].
8-8
Specify the IP Address of the recipient. Address Book Direct Input Group destination Program destination For details of procedure for specifying the IP address, refer to the "Specifying only one destination" on page 8-14 and "Specifying multiple destinations (Broadcast transmission)" on page 8-20. Re-select the destination to be cancelled to cancel the selected destination. All entered numbers and selected settings are cleared on pressing [Reset] key. When [Manual Destination Input] is prohibited, [Direct Input] tab is not displayed. Touch [Color] on the IP Address Fax screen to send a color fax. IP Address of recipient can be easily specified on registering the IP Address of recipient to the Address Book, Group destination, and Program destination. Entered destination is displayed in the left panel of broadcast destination list.
Press [Start] key. When the Destination Check Display Function is set, the Destination Settings screen is displayed. Confirm that the destination is correct and touch [Send]. Press [Stop] key when the fax sending is aborted. Scanning of the original begins, and the original is sent.
!
Detail
If the fax could not be sent, a TX Result Report is printed (when specified as to print the TX Result Report).
8-9
8
8.3
Whether the original is to be transmitted in color or monochrome is set.
Specifying transmission color settings (IP address fax)
2
Reminder
Color transmission and reception is possible only when IP Address Fax are used. Color faxes cannot be transmitted or received in internet fax. The recipients machine should correspond to IP Address Fax.
Specifying transmission color settings
1 2 3
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Touch [Scan Settings]. Touch [Quality Adjustment].
Select the desired mode from "Color". [Auto Color]: Automatically detects the color of the original and scans accordingly. [Full Color]: Scans at full color. [Gray Scale]: Select this setting when the original is full of halftone colors such as in black-and-white photo. [Black]: Select this setting for an original which has only black and white colors without any gray. File type is fixed to PDF in color transmission mode. When gray scale is selected, transmission image becomes monochromatic.
5 6 7
8-10
Touch [OK]. Returns to Scan Settings screen. Touch [OK]. Returns to Fax/Scan screen. Set other functions if required.
8.4
Specifying the scan conditions

If [Scan Settings] is touched, [Original Type], [Simplex/Duplex], [Resolution], [File Type], [Density] are displayed and transmission conditions as per the original to be sent can be specified. Specifying scan settings
1 2
Touch [Scan Settings] of the Fax/Scan screen. Touch the button to be specified.
2
Note
Transmission condition cannot be specified for each page.

Original type % Set the Original Type as per the original contents.
There are following 5 types of Original Type. At the time of purchase, original type is set for [Text/Photo]. [Text]: Touch only when the text original is to be scanned. The photo original becomes dark if it is scanned by selecting this mode without repeating the neutral color of the photo. [Text/Photo]: Touch when originals with text and photos (half tone) mixed together, are to be scanned. Select this mode when text and photos are mixed together on 1 page or when text and photos are mixed together on multiple pages. [Photo]: Touch only when the photo (half tone) original is to be scanned. [Dot Matrix Original]: Touch when the originals with light text like the text written by pencil etc. is scanned. [Copied Paper]: Touch when the copied image is scanned as original.
8-11
8
Simplex/Duplex % Set the scanning mode in ADF as per the original condition.
The 3 types of scanning modes are as follows. At the time of purchase, mode is set to [1-Sided]. [1-Sided]: Touch to scan 1-sided original. [2-Sided]: Touch to scan 2-sided original. [Cover + 2-Sided]: Touch to scan cover and 2-sided original. Only the front side is scanned for cover page and the back side is also scanned from the second page onwards. Resolution % Set the resolution to get a fine scanned original.
There are following 5 types for Resolution. At the time of purchase, resolution is set to [200e200Fine]. [200e100 (Standard)]: Touch when transmission time is to be shortened. [200e200 (Fine)]: Touch to scan the normal original. [300e300dpi]: Touch to scan the normal original of a higher resolution. [400e400 (Super Fine)]: Touch to scan the original having small text and figures. [600e600 (Ultra Fine)]: Touch to scan especially fine originals with fine drawings and text.
2
Note
When [300 e 300dpi] is selected, it is converted to 400 e 400dpi and transmitted. However, if compact PDF is selected at the time of IP Address Fax transmission, it is transmitted at 300 e 300dpi. The communication time increases for more fine scanning and large amount of information to be transmitted.
8-12 bizhub C451/C550/C650
Network Fax Operations (Option) Density % Set the density as per the original contents.
Density can be set in 9 levels. At the time of purchase, density is set to [Standard]. [Light]: Touch for light scanning. [Standard]: Touch for normal scanning. [Dark]: Touch for dark scanning.
8-13
8
8.5 Specifying only one destination
Only one destination can be specified in internet fax in the following ways. Specifying from registered destination Specifying by direct input Specifying from the program destination
!
Detail
For details on the method of specifying form registered destination, refer to "Specifying from registered destination" on page 8-14. Refer to "Specifying by direct input" on page 8-18 for the method to specify by direct input. Refer to "Send a fax with program destination" on page 8-22 for the method to specify from the program.
Specifying from registered destination When the Address Book is registered, specification can be done by searching from registered search text. % Touch the desired destination button in displayed [Address Book] tab. When desired destination button is not displayed, it can be searched by the following methods. Touch search text button Searching by destination type Enter the details and search Re-select the destination to be cancelled to cancel the selected destination. If [Reset] key is pressed, the selected destination and the settings are cleared. Refer to the "Searching the registered destination (Search text button)" on page 8-15 for the method of searching the registered destination by touching search character button. For details on method of searching by destination type, refer to the "Searching the registered destination (Address type)" on page 8-15. For details on searching after entering the details, refer to the "Searching the registered destination (Detail search)" on page 8-16.
8-14
Network Fax Operations (Option) Searching the registered destination (Search text button) Destination can be searched from the specified search text when destination is registered. % Touch Index buttons ([favorites], [ABC] - [WXYZ], [etc]) displayed in the [Address Book] tab.
Desired destination button is displayed. Searching the registered destination (Address type) Destination can be searched from the address type (Internet Fax, IP Address Fax etc.).
Touch [Search] of [Address Book] tab.
8-15
8
3
Select the destination type.
If the button for the desired destination type is not displayed, touch or . Display of default settings of [Address Book] tab can be changed to address type by Default Address Book setting.
Desired destination button is displayed. Searching the registered destination (Detail search) Destination can be searched from destination name or E-mail address or a part of IP Address.
Touch [Detail Search].
When the destination applicable to the entered information is not found, "Search Result: 0" is displayed and button is not displayed on the screen.
8-16
Touch [Name] or [Destination]. Enter the name or E-mail address, IP Address by the keyboard displayed on the screen and touch [OK]. If "Uppercase and Lowercase Letters" in the Search Option Settings screen of Utility mode is set to "Differentiate", the search is performed while differentiating between uppercase and lowercase letters. If "Search Option Screen" in the Search Option Settings screen of Utility mode is set to "ON", the Search Option screen is displayed.
To select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters, display the Search Options screen.
Desired destination button is displayed.
8-17
8
Specifying by direct input
The destination can be specified by direct input even if the destination is not registered in the Address Book.
2
Note
When [Manual Destination Input] is prohibited, [Direct Input] tab is not displayed.
Touch [Direct Input] on Fax/Scan screen.
Select Destination type. Touch [Internet Fax] to send the internet fax. Touch [IP Address Fax] to send IP Address Fax.
Enter the destination and then touch [OK]. In case of internet fax, enter E-mail address of transmission destination with the keyboard on the screen.
8-18
In case of IP Address Fax, touch [IP Address] and enter the IP Address or the host name with the keypad or keyboard of the screen and touch [OK]. To change the port number, press [C] (clear) key to clear the number, and enter the desired port number with the keypad. If the recipients machine is a color machine, and a color original is to be sent, touch [Color].
When [C] (clear) key is pressed, all entered addresses or numbers are cleared. The destination is specified.
8-19
8
8.6
Specifying multiple destinations (Broadcast transmission)

A fax can be sent to multiple destinations at the same time. This function is called broadcast transmission.
Method Broadcast transmission only of internet fax Mixed broadcast transmission of internet fax/ G3 fax Broadcast transmission of IP Address Fax Mixed broadcast transmission of IP Address Fax/G3 Fax In case of mixed broadcast of internet fax/ G3 fax In case of mixed broadcast of Internet fax/ IP Address Fax/ G3 Fax Description Total 505 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 5 by direct input. Total 605 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 105 by direct input (Internet fax destinations 5, G3 fax destinations 100). Total 505 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 5 by direct input. However, the mixing color and monochrome is not possible. Total 605 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 105 by direct input (IP address fax destinations 5, G3 fax destinations 100). Only monochrome mode. Total 605 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 105 by direct input (G3 fax destinations 100, internet fax destinations 5). Only monochrome mode. Total 605 faxes including 500 Address Book destinations and 105 by direct input (G3 fax destination 100, internet fax, IP address fax destinations 5). Only monochrome mode.
The following procedure describes how to specify multiple destinations. Specifying from registered destination Specifying by direct input Specifying by the group button Specifying from the program destination Destinations can be specified with the combination of above-mentioned methods.
2
Reminder
In case of IP address fax, if the destination at which recipients machine type is set to [Color] and the destination at which recipients machine type is set to [Monochrome], the transmission is in Monochrome mode. When Internet Fax is sent by broadcast transmission, MDN/DSN request is not transmitted.
!
Detail
For details on method of specifying from Address Book or direct input, refer to "Specifying multiple destinations (by registered destination and direct input)" on page 8-20. For details on method of specifying with the Group button, refer to "Specifying multiple destinations (by group button)" on page 8-21. Refer to "Send a fax with program destination" on page 8-22 for the method to specify by the program.
Specifying multiple destinations (by registered destination and direct input) % The destination that is to be specified only when necessary is specified by referring to "Specifying only one destination" on page 8-14. Touch the required destination continuously to select multiple registered destinations. When multiple destinations are to be specified by the direct input, after entering the destination touch [Next Destination] to enter the next destination. Re-select the destination to be cancelled to cancel the registered destination. If [Reset] key is pressed, the selected destination and the settings are cleared. Multiple destinations are specified.
8-20
Network Fax Operations (Option) Specifying multiple destinations (by group button)
Touch [Group]. If [Group] is not displayed, touch or .
Touch the targeted group button. Multiple destinations are specified.
!
Detail
Display of default settings of [Address Book] tab can be changed to address type by Default Address Book setting.
8-21
8
8.7 Send a fax with program destination
When the program destination is registered, a fax can be sent by specifying the registered program button. If transmission settings (Original type and original specification etc.) are registered by a program button, a fax can be sent only by touching that button without specifying function settings at each time. The transmission is possible once after registering group button in 1 program button. Sending a fax after specifying program destination
1 2 3
Press [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan screen. Load the original. Refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26 for details on positioning the original.
Press [Mode Memory] key.
Touch [Page List].
Touch the page button registered by the targeted program and then touch [OK]. Page button is displayed on touching and .
8-22
8
.
Touch the targeted program button and touch [OK]. Program button is displayed on touching and You can specify only one program destination.
Settings and destination are called.
Press [Start] key. The original is scanned and then transmitted.
8-23
8
8.8 When unable to send
When IP address fax is used, if the fax cannot be sent because the recipients line was busy, it can be transmitted again by using the redial function. The redial function of this function has auto redial, manual redial.
2
Note
The destination cannot be changed with auto redial or manual redial. There is no E-mail resending function in internet fax.
Redial Dialing again at the same destination is known as redial. When fax cannot be sent since the line of recipients fax machine is busy, the number is redialed after the lapse of the specific period. Before redialing, the sent job is treated to be job queued of the redial stand by. Auto redial function When it is unable to send the fax because the recipients line is busy, it is automatically redialed as per the auto redial function, which is set through the Line Parameter Settings.
!
Detail
In advance, the number of auto redials is specified as 3 times for 3 minutes.

Redial confirmation screen When the fax cannot be sent due to the problem in the recipients fax machine, the screen to confirm redial is displayed.
Touch [OK].
Redialing begins after the setting time progresses. When the transmission is not possible even after redialing, the display screen to confirm that it cannot be terminated normally by the job, is displayed.
8-24
Touch [OK]. To check the result for jobs that have been sent, touch [Job History].
Manual redial (Current jobs list) The job waited due to redial is manually redialed.
1 2 3
Touch [Job List] and then touch [Job Details] button. Touch [Send]. Select the job condition [Waiting To Redial] and then select [Redial] button.
Redial screen is displayed.
Touch [OK]. The redialing of the selected job is performed.
8-25
8
8.9 Reserving the transmission
A function for queuing the next transmission while printing or during transmission. This function is called reserved transmission.
1 2
Touch [Next Scan/Fax Job]. Unless [TX Display] or [RX Display] is not set to "Yes", the [Next Scan/Fax Job] is not displayed.
Load the original.
Refer to "Feeding the document" on page 2-26 for details on positioning the original.
3 4 5
Specify the functions if required. For details on Scan Settings, refer to "Specifying the scan conditions" on page 8-11.
Specify the destination. Press [Start] key.
!
Detail
When the reserved transmission is to be cancelled, touch [Job List] and then touch [Delete].
8-26
8.10
Stopping the transmission

Stopping during transmission In case of job during transmission, the transmission can be stopped from the next operation.
2
Note
A fax to be stored in this machine are called queued jobs.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Touch [Job List]. Touch [Job Details]. Touch [Send]. Check that the [Current Jobs List] is selected. Touch [Delete] to delete the job to be cancelled. Touch [Yes] and then touch [OK].
The job is deleted.
Touch [Close] until it returns to Fax/Scan screen.
8-27
8-28
Appendix
Appendix
9 Appendix
Entering text
The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers. Any of the following keyboards may appear. Example Password input screen:
9
9.1
Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size:
9-3
Appendix Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols).
Enlarging the keyboard The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read.
While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON]. The keyboard is displayed enlarged.
To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged.
2
Note
The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged.
9-4
Appendix To type text % Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared. To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift]. Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad. The entered characters appear in the text box.
2
Note
To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel]. To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key. Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered.
!
Detail
To change a character in the entered text, touch and to move the cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number.
9-5
Appendix
9-6
10
Index
Index
10 Index
Symbols
[Power] (auxiliary power) key 2-8 Copies 3-45, 3-55, 4-39 Copies & Pages 3-55 Copy protection 3-29, 3-75 Cover mode 3-70 Cover mode tab 3-20 Cover sheet 2-100 Custom page sizes 3-8, 3-43, 3-54
10
Numerics
1-sided/2-sided 4-39 2in1 2-42 4in1 2-42 8in1 2-42
D
Date 3-31, 3-77 Date/Time 5-58 Deleting documents 4-24 Density 5-48, 7-12, 8-13 Destination settings 7-13 Detail search 7-15, 8-16 Detecting original size 7-23 Digital signature 5-79 Direct input 4-8, 5-16, 5-24, 5-29, 7-17, 8-18 Document details 4-31 Document feeding 2-26 Document name 5-73 Document orientation 1-6 Documents 2-95 Duplex 3-15, 3-46, 3-63, 8-12 Duplex/Combine 2-41 Duplicating documents 4-29
A
Aborting 7-28 Account track 2-14, 3-13, 3-60 Address book 5-81, 6-28 Address type 7-14 Address types 8-15 ADF 2-26, 2-95, 7-6 Annotation 5-58 Auto paper setting 2-35 Auto zoom setting 2-37
B
Back cover 3-20, 3-46, 3-70 Background removal 5-51 Basic screen 2-5 Basic tab 3-7 Binding direction 3-15, 3-46, 3-63 Binding margin 3-16 Binding position 3-46 Book copy 2-117, 5-54 Booklet 2-134, 3-15, 3-63 Booklet original 2-129 Border 3-14 Broadcast transmission 7-19, 8-20 Bypass tray 2-22
E
Editing a watermark 3-24 E-Mail destination 5-81 E-Mail encryption 5-79 E-Mail setting 5-77 Encrypted PDF user box 4-18, 4-57 Enlarge/Reduce settings 2-40 Entering text 9-3
C
Caution notations and labels 1-19 Center Staple & Fold 2-60, 2-63 Certificate information 6-29 Changing document name 4-25 Chapter 3-15, 3-66 Chapters 2-110 Collate 3-45, 3-56 Color 5-49 Color selection 3-32, 3-46, 3-80 Color settings 3-32, 3-46, 3-80 Combination 3-14, 3-46 Combine 6-18 Combined pages 2-42 Combined printing 4-44 Communication settings 5-39, 7-3 Control panel 2-3
F
Fax cannot be sent 7-24, 8-24 Fax cover sheet 3-85 File document screen 4-20 File type 5-45 Finish 3-63 Finish tab 3-18 Finishing 2-48, 3-46, 4-40 Folding 2-60, 3-19, 3-46, 3-63 Font settings 3-33 Frame erase 5-53 Front cover 3-20, 3-46, 3-70 FTP 5-26, 5-88 Full size 2-38
10-3
10
G
General fax operation 7-3, 8-3, 8-7 General settings 3-45, 3-55 Glossy mode 3-32, 3-46, 3-80 Group 2-48, 2-52, 6-34 Group destinations 5-14, 5-94, 7-19, 8-21 Original type 2-45, 5-41, 7-10, 8-11 Output method 3-10, 3-46, 3-56 Output tray 3-19, 3-46, 3-68 Overlap width line 3-14, 3-63 Overlay 3-25 Overlay file 3-28 Oversized paper 2-90
Index
H
Half-Fold 2-60 Half-fold 2-60 Header/Footer 5-67 Help 2-75 Hole punching 3-19, 3-46, 3-63
P
Page attributes 3-42, 3-53 Page number 3-31, 3-77, 5-61 Page setup 3-39, 3-42, 3-49, 3-53 Pages 3-45, 3-55 Paper 3-42 Paper arrangement 3-19, 3-63 Paper capacity 2-80 Paper settings 2-83 Paper size 2-79, 3-7, 3-8, 3-53 Paper source 3-45 Paper tray 3-8, 3-68 Paper type 2-80, 3-68 Pattern 3-32 PC (SMB) 5-22, 5-84 Per page setting 3-21, 3-72 Phone book 3-83, 3-91 Poster mode 2-125, 3-14 PostScript options 3-44 Power save 2-10 Power source 1-22 Previewing 4-33 Print settings 4-38 Print type 3-15, 3-46, 3-63 Printer specific options 3-46 Printing 3-40, 3-45, 3-49, 3-55 Printing and saving 4-14 Program 6-37 Program destinations 7-21, 8-22 Program jobs 2-113 Proof print 3-10, 3-56 Punch settings 2-48, 2-57
I
Icons 2-7 Image adjustment 2-131 Image compression 3-32 Image repeat 2-121 Insert image 2-107 Insert sheet 2-103 Interrupt 2-69
L
Layout 3-46, 3-63 Layout tab 3-14 LCT 2-21 LDAP search 5-20 Legal restrictions on copying 1-7 Loading paper 2-17, 2-19, 2-20, 2-21, 2-22 Loading the original 7-6 Long original 5-75
M
Main power switch 2-8 Manual conventions 1-4 Memory overflow 7-23 Minimal 2-39 Mixed original 5-75 Mode memory 2-70 Moving documents 4-27 Multi-page original 7-7
Q
Quality 3-80 Quality adjustment 3-32, 3-80 Quality tab 3-32 Quick copy screen 2-5
N
N in 1 3-14 Non-standard-sized paper 2-86
O
Offset 3-46, 3-56 OHP interleave 2-97 Operating environment 1-22 Options 3-48 Orientation 3-42, 3-53 Original > Copy settings 2-41 Original auto rotation 7-23 Original glass 2-27, 2-96, 7-6 Original settings 5-39, 5-75 Original size 3-7
R
Recall copy program 2-73 Record 7-18 Redial 7-24, 8-25 Registered destination 5-12, 5-23, 5-27, 7-13, 8-14 Regulation notices 1-14 Reserved 7-27, 8-26 Resolution 3-32, 3-46, 5-44, 7-11, 8-12
10-4
Index
10
S
S/MIME 6-28 Saddle stitch 3-18, 3-63 Safety information 1-8 Save in user box 2-137, 3-10, 3-56 Saving copy documents 4-4 Saving in user box mode 4-10 Saving scanned data 4-7 Scale 3-42, 3-53 Scan settings 5-39, 7-3 Scan size 5-56 Scan to e-mail 5-12 Scan/Fax programs 5-3 Search text button 8-15 Search word key 7-14 Searching for user box name 4-23 Secure print 3-10, 3-56 Secure print user box 4-16, 4-51 Send & Print 5-72 Sending data to a server (WebDAV) 5-31 Separate scan 2-28, 5-49 Sharpness 5-52 Shifting images 3-17, 3-65 Simplex 7-10, 8-12 Simplex/Duplex 5-43, 7-10, 8-12 Sort 2-48, 2-51 Space requirements 1-20 Special paper 2-81, 2-92 Specifying the destination 8-14 Specifying the scan conditions 7-9, 8-11 Stamp 5-64 Stamp/Composition 2-136, 3-74 Stamp/Composition tab 3-23 Staple settings 2-48, 2-54 Stapling 3-18, 3-46, 3-63 Stop 8-27 Subject 6-56
U
URL notification setting 5-78 Use document 4-35 Use document screen 4-36 User authentication 2-11, 3-12, 3-59 User box 5-83 User box destinations 4-7 Utility mode 5-80
W
Warm-up 2-9 Watermark 3-23
Z
Z-folded original 5-75 Zoom 3-7
T
Temporarily stopping 2-68 Temporary one-touch 6-55 Text 6-57 Text entry 9-3 Thumbnail 6-16 Time 3-31, 3-77 Timer TX 7-30 Touch panel 2-5 Transmission color 8-10 Transmission settings 3-84 Transparency interleave 3-22, 3-46, 3-70 Tray 1 2-17 Tray 2 2-17 Tray 3 2-19 Tray 4 2-20 Tri-fold 2-60, 2-66
10-5
10
Index
10-6

Bizhub c451 c550 c650 Um

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub c451 c550 c650 Um

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C451/C550/C650

1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10

2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10

2.13 2.14 2.15

2.18 2.19 2.20 2.21 2.22

3-56 3-56 3-59 3-60 3-61 3-63 3-65 3-66 3-67

3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21

Deleting a document ..................................................................................................................... 4-24 Changing the document name..................................................................................................... 4-25

4.7 4.8 4.9

Network Scanner Operations

Registering a group destination .................................................................................................. 5-94

PageScope Web Connection Operations

6-16 6-16 6-18 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-25

Fax Operations (Option)

Network Fax Operations (Option)

An illustration inserted here shows what operations must be performed.

Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded.

Disassemble and modification

Introduction Power cord

Introduction When moving the machine

Introduction Internal laser radiation

Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit

For Denmark users

Introduction For Norway users

* Only for the U.S.A.

o: Available e: Not available

[Stop] key [Proof Copy] key [Start] key

[C] (clear) key Keypad

[Enlarge Display] key [Accessibility] key [Power Save] key

[Brightness] dial [User Box] key

Basic settings screens

Quick Copy screen

Item Name Message display area Functions/settings display area

Toner supply indicators Left panel

[Check Job] button [Job List] button

Icons that appear in the screen

Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.

Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.

Appears when a external memory (USB memory) is connected.

Copy Operations Scanning during warm-up

Close the main power switch cover.

Type in the user name, and then touch [OK].

Type in the account name, and then touch [OK].

Type in the password, and then touch [OK].

Loading paper into tray 1 and tray 2

Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded.

Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.

Close tray 1 or tray 2.

Loading paper into tray 3

Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3.

Pull out tray 4.

Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 4.

Loading paper into the LCT

Select the paper type.

Copy Operations To print on colored paper, envelopes or letterheads, touch

Using the original glass

When loaded in the v orientation

When loaded in the w orientation

Align the document with the of the document scales.

mark in the back-left corner

Close the ADF.

In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].